Chevrolet 2010 Cobalt Owner Manual

2010 Chevrolet Cobalt Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Seats and Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Features and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Driving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128
2010 Chevrolet Cobalt Owner Manual M
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Canadian Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and
the name COBALT are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle either because they are options
that you did not purchase or due to changes
subsequent to the printing of this owner manual. Please
refer to the purchase documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found on
your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in the U.S.A.
Part No. 25895310 A First Printing
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list
of what is in the manual and the page number where it
can be found.
©
2009 General Motors Corporation. All rights Reserved.
iii
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,” or
“Do not let this happen.”
Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this
manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
which will result in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result
in injury or death.
{ WARNING:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Notice: This means there is something that could
result in property or vehicle damage. This would not
be covered by the vehicle's warranty.
iv
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information relating
to a specific component, control, message, gage,
or indicator.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
. : Fuel Gage
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
v
2 NOTES
vi
Section 1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Sensing System for Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
In Brief
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portable Audio Devices
(Auxiliary Input or USB Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-14
1-14
1-16
1-16
1-17
1-17
1-18
1-18
1-18
1-18
1-19
1-19
1-20
1-20
1-21
1-21
1-22
1-1
Instrument Panel
1-2
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4‑16.
K. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4‑11.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4‑4.
L. Horn on page 4‑3.
C. Cruise Control on page 4‑6 (If Equipped) .
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑37.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4‑19.
M. Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑9
(If Equipped) . Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
on page 5‑6 (If Equipped).
E. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑84
(If Equipped) .
N. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and
Cigarette Lighter on page 4‑13.
F. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4‑3.
O. Shift Lever (Manual Shown). See Manual
Transmission Operation on page 3‑28 and
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 3‑26.
G. Windshield Wipers on page 4‑5 and Windshield
Washer on page 4‑6.
H. Audio System(s) on page 4‑52.
I. Fog Lamps on page 4‑10 (If Equipped) .
J. Trunk Release. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
P. Climate Control System on page 4‑14.
Q. Heated Seats on page 2‑4 (If Equipped) .
R. Glove Box on page 3‑39.
1-3
Initial Drive Information
This section provides a brief overview about some of
the important features that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer to each of the
features which can be found later in this owner manual.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and
unlock the doors from up to 60 m (195 feet) away from
the vehicle.
Press K to unlock the
driver door. Press again
within five seconds to
unlock all remaining
doors.
Press
Q to lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized.
Press and hold
open the trunk.
V for approximately one second to
L and release to locate the vehicle.
Press L and hold for three seconds to sound the panic
Press
alarm.
Press
L again to cancel the panic alarm.
See Keys on page 3‑3 and Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4.
Remote Vehicle Start
With this feature the engine can be started from outside
of the vehicle.
Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press
Q.
3. Immediately after completing Step 2, press and
hold / until the turn signal lamps flash.
1-4
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on
and remain on as long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate control system may
come on.
Power Door Locks
This vehicle may have
power door locks. The
controls are located on
the driver and front
passenger door armrests.
The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat
the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote start
can be extended only once.
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start:
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and hold /.
.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
.
Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN and then
LOCK/OFF.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑6.
Door Locks
To lock the driver door from outside the vehicle, turn the
key clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to unlock.
K:
Q:
Press to unlock the doors.
Press to lock the doors.
For more information see:
.
Door Locks on page 3‑8.
.
Power Door Locks on page 3‑9.
.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 3‑4.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also
be used to lock or unlock the doors.
From the inside, use the manual lock knobs on each
door or use the power door locks.
1-5
Trunk Release
Seat Adjustment
In addition to the trunk release button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, the trunk can be
opened from inside the vehicle by pressing the remote
trunk release button. This button is located inside the
driver storage compartment, on the left side of the
instrument panel .
Manual Seats
See Trunk on page 3‑12.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
Windows
Power Windows
For vehicles with power
windows, the switches on
the driver door armrest
control each window. The
switch on each passenger
door controls only that
doors window.
Press the front of the switch to open the window and
pull the switch up to close it.
See Power Windows on page 3‑15.
1-6
Try to move the seat to be sure it is locked in place.
See Manual Seats on page 2‑2.
Seat Height Adjuster
Reclining Seatbacks
To raise or lower the driver seat, move the lever upward
or downward repeatedly until the seat is at the desired
height.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
See Seat Height Adjuster on page 2‑3.
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑4.
1-7
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
If equipped, the lumbar
knob is located on the
front of the driver
seat lower cushion.
Turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the
lumbar support.
This vehicle may have
heated front seats.
The switches are located
on the instrument panel
above the climate control
system.
Driver's Switch shown
See Manual Lumbar on page 2‑3.
Press the side of the switch with the double indicator
lights to turn the seat to the highest setting.
Press the side of the switch with the single indicator
light to turn the seat to the lowest setting.
Return the switch to the center to turn off the
heated seat.
See Heated Seats on page 2‑4.
1-8
Head Restraint Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants
are installed and adjusted properly.
See Head Restraints on page 2‑7.
Safety Belt
Refer to the following sections for important information
on how to use safety belts properly.
.
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2‑10.
.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2‑15.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑24.
.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2‑41.
1-9
Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag
The passenger sensing system, if equipped, will turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags and roof-rail airbags are
not affected by this.
If the vehicle has a passenger sensing system, the
passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the
instrument panel when the vehicle is started.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door
armrest.
1. Use the selector switch located below the four-way
control pad to choose either the left or right outside
mirror.
United States
Canada
See Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo Engine)
on page 2‑62 or Passenger Sensing System (With
Turbo Engine) on page 2‑67 for important information.
1-10
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pull
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return it to the original position.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Interior Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view of behind the vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to reduce the glare of headlamps from behind.
Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use. See Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 3‑37.
The tilt wheel lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down into a
comfortable position.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in
place.
See Tilt Wheel on page 4‑3.
1-11
Interior Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Dome Lamp
The vehicle may have a dome lamp.
Move the lever near the dome lamp to the following
positions:
9 : Turns the lamp off, even when a door is opened.
1 : Turns the lamp on whenever a door is opened.
+ : Turns the dome lamp on.
Mirror Reading Lamp
The vehicle may have reading lamps on the rearview
mirror. Press the button near each lamp to turn the
reading lamps on and off.
For more information on interior lighting, see:
The lever is on the left side of the steering column.
2 : Turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps.
.
Entry/Exit Lighting on page 4‑11.
; : Turns on the parking lamps and taillamps only.
.
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4‑11.
AUTO : Automatically turns on the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) during daytime, and the headlamps,
parking lamps, and taillamps at night.
P : When operating in AUTO, a momentary turn of the
switch to Off/On will turn the Automatic Headlamp
System off or back on. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
the automatic transmission must be in P (Park) or the
manual transmission must have the park brake set,
before the Automatic Headlamp System can be
turned off.
1-12
For more information, see:
.
Headlamps on page 4‑9.
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
the steering column.
.
Fog Lamps on page 4‑10.
9 : Turns the wipers off.
.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 4‑10.
.
Headlamps on Reminder on page 4‑10.
& : Turn this band for intermittent or speed sensitive
operation. As vehicle speed increases or decreases, the
wiper interval also increases or decreases.
.
Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 4‑10.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
x : Delays wiping cycle. Turn the band up for more
frequent wipes.
6 : Slow wipes.
1 : Fast wipes.
8 : Use for a single wiping cycle.
Windshield Washer : Press the button at the end of
the lever until the washers begin.
See Windshield Wipers on page 4‑5 and Windshield
Washer on page 4‑6.
1-13
Climate Controls
Vehicle Features
The vehicle's heating, cooling, and ventilation can be
controlled with this system.
Radio(s)
Vehicles with Air Conditioning shown, without Air
Conditioning similar
A. Air Delivery Mode Control
D. Air Conditioning
B. Fan Control
E. Rear Window
Defogger
C. Temperature Control
F. Recirculation
See Climate Control System on page 4‑14.
1-14
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown
O : Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
BAND : Press to choose between FM, AM, or XM™,
if equipped.
f : Select radio stations.
© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.
4 : Press 4 to display additional text information related
to the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3,
WMA song. Song title information will be displayed on
the top line of the display while the artist information will
be displayed on the bottom line, it the information is
available during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback.
When information is not available, “No Info” displays.
For more information about these and other radio
features, see Radio(s) on page 4‑54.
Storing a Favorite Station
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio
stations are stored as either favorites or presets.
For radios with a FAV button, a maximum of 36 stations
can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located
below the radio station frequency tabs and by using
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to go through up to
six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations
available per page. Each page of favorites can contain
any combination of AM, FM, or XM stations.
For radios without a FAV button, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed on
the six numbered buttons.
For more information, see Radio(s) on page 4‑54.
Setting the Clock
To set the time and date for the Radio with CD (MP3)
and USB port or the Radio with CD (MP3) player:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN.
O to turn the radio on.
Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
2. Press
3.
minute, month, day, and year) displays.
4. Press the softkey located below any one of the
tabs that you want to change.
5. Increase or decrease the time or date by turning
clockwise or counterclockwise.
f
For detailed instructions on setting the clock for your
specific audio system, see Setting the Clock on
page 4‑53.
1-15
Satellite Radio
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM satellite radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound.
A fee is required to receive the XM service.
For more information, refer to:
.
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
.
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See “XM Satellite Radio Service” under Radio(s) on
page 4‑54.
1-16
Portable Audio Devices
(Auxiliary Input or USB Port)
This vehicle may have an auxiliary input jack and a
USB port, located on the audio faceplate. External
devices such as iPods®, laptop computers, MP3
players, CD changers, USB storage devices, etc. can
be connected to the auxiliary input jack using a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) cable or the USB port depending on the audio
system.
Press the CD/AUX button to play audio from the
portable player.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” and “Using the
USB Port” under Radio(s) on page 4‑54.
Steering Wheel Controls
If equipped, some audio
controls can be adjusted
using the controls on the
right side of the steering
wheel.
Bluetooth®
For vehicles with an in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
allows users with a Bluetooth enabled cell phone to
make and receive hands-free calls using the vehicle’s
audio system and controls.
The Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it can be used in
the vehicle. Not all phones will support all functions.
For more information visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
For more information, see Bluetooth® on page 4‑74.
e + / e − : Increases or decreases volume.
w / x : Press to change radio stations, select tracks
on a CD, or to select tracks and navigate folders on an
iPod® or USB device.
b g : Press to silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound on. Press and hold longer
than two seconds to interact with the OnStar® or
Bluetooth systems.
c:
Press to reject an incoming call, or to end a call.
For more information, see Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 4‑84.
1-17
Cruise Control
Power Outlets
The cruise control buttons
are located on the left
side of the steering wheel.
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
The accessory power outlet is located in the center
console, rearward of the shift lever.
To use the accessory power outlet, remove the cover.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑12 and
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on page 4‑13
(If Equipped).
Performance and Maintenance
J : On/Off.
RES+ : Press to resume or accelerate speed.
SET− : Press to set or decrease speed.
For more information, see Cruise Control on page 4‑6.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The traction control system limits wheel spin. The
system turns on automatically every time the vehicle is
started.
.
To turn off traction control, press and release
the instrument panel. F illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message displays. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40.
.
Press and release the button again to turn on
traction control.
d on
For more information, see Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 5‑9.
1-18
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Tire Pressure Monitor
The Electronic Stability Control system assists with
directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. The system turns on automatically every
time the vehicle is started.
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS).
.
To turn off both traction control and Electronic
Stability Control, press and hold d until F
illuminates and the appropriate DIC message
displays. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑40.
.
Press and release the button again to turn on both
systems.
For more information, see Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 5‑6.
The Tire Pressure Monitor
alerts you when a
significant reduction in
pressure occurs in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires
by illuminating the low tire
pressure warning light on
the instrument cluster.
The warning light will remain on until the tire pressure is
corrected. The proper tire pressures for your vehicle are
listed on the Tire and Loading Information label located
on the driver side center pillar (B pillar). See Loading
the Vehicle on page 5‑25.
1-19
You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire
pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is
first started and then turn off as you drive. This may be
an early indicator that your tire pressures are getting
low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
Note: The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about
low tire pressure, but it does not replace normal monthly
tire maintenance. It is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑65 and
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑67.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a
tire sealant and compressor kit. The kit can be used to
seal small punctures in the tread area of the tire.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 6‑81 for
complete operating information.
1-20
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life
based on vehicle use and displays a DIC message
when it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset to 100% only
following an oil change.
Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press the DIC information and reset buttons at the
same time to enter the personalization menu.
3. Press the information button until the DIC display
shows OIL-LIFE RESET.
4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED.
5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑21.
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Roadside Assistance Program
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
U.S.: 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872)
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
.
When road and weather conditions are
appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped.
.
Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
.
Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
.
Combine several trips into a single trip.
.
Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC
Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near
the size.
.
Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, you are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program. This
program provides technically trained advisors who are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, minor repair
information or towing arrangements.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
If you have a current OnStar subscription, press the
OnStar button and the current GPS location will be sent
to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem,
contact Roadside Assistance, and relay exact location
to get you the help you need.
Online Owner Center
The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service
that includes online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner manual, special
privileges and more.
Sign up today at: www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
1-21
OnStar®
How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects you to a specially
trained OnStar advisor to verify your account
information and to answer questions.
] : Push this red emergency button to get priority help
from specially trained OnStar emergency advisors.
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
navigation, diagnostics, and calling services.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can automatically alert an
OnStar advisor who is immediately connected to the
vehicle to see if you need help.
X : Push this button for hands-free, voice-activated
calling and to give voice commands for turn-by-turn
navigation.
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn-by-Turn Navigation and Hands-Free
Calling are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar
services are available on all vehicles. For more
information see the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada),
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)
or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press Q to speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
For a full description of OnStar services and system
limitations, see the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.
OnStar service is subject to the OnStar terms and
conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
1-22
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed
areas, or at all times.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar call center when Q is pressed, ] is pressed,
or if the airbags or ACR system deploy. This information
usually includes the vehicle's GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional information regarding the
crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the direction
from which the vehicle was hit). When the virtual
advisor feature of OnStar hands-free calling is used, the
vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle's GPS location
so they can provide services where it is located.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar hands-free calling. See
Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑84 for more
information.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's Guide for more
information.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system
may not be functioning properly. Press Q and request a
vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press Q to confirm
that the OnStar equipment is active.
1-23
2 NOTES
1-24
Section 2
Seats and Restraint System
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Seat Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Easy Entry Seat (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . .
Passenger Sensing System
(Without Turbo Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger Sensing System
(With Turbo Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . .
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-41
2-47
2-50
2-53
2-56
2-58
2-59
2-59
2-60
2-62
2-67
2-72
2-73
2-74
2-74
2-75
2-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{ WARNING:
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
2-2
Seat Height Adjuster
Manual Lumbar
On vehicles with this
feature, the knob is
located on the front of the
driver seat lower cushion
on the inboard side.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the lumbar support.
The driver's seat height adjuster is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
To raise the seat, move the lever upward repeatedly
until the seat is at the desired height. To lower the seat,
move the lever downward repeatedly until the seat is at
the desired height.
2-3
Heated Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
Your vehicle may have heated front seats. The switches
are located on the instrument panel above the climate
control system.
Press the side of the
switch with the double
indicator lights to turn on
the heated seat at the
highest setting.
{ WARNING:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{ WARNING:
Driver's Switch Shown,
Passenger's Switch
Similar
Both indicator lights will be lit to indicate that the setting
is on high. Press the side of the switch with the single
indicator light to go to the low setting. The indicator light
will be lit to indicate that the setting is on low. Return
the switch to the center to turn off the heated seat.
If your vehicle has been turned off, the last heated seat
setting will be retained when the vehicle is started
again.
2-4
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side of
the seats.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2-5
{ WARNING:
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,
the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
2-6
Head Restraints
Pull the head restraint up
to raise it. To lower the
head restraint, press the
button, located on the top
of the seatback, and push
the restraint down.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a
crash.
2-7
Easy Entry Seat (Coupe)
To use the easy entry seat, do the following:
{ WARNING:
If the easy entry right front seat is not locked, it
can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the person
sitting there could be injured. After you have used
it, be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat
to be sure it is locked.
{ WARNING:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
The front passenger seat can be used to easily get in
and out of the rear seat.
2-8
1. Push down the easy entry seat handle located on
the rear of the seatback on the outboard side to
release the seatback.
2. Tilt the seatback forward completely while pushing
the seat forward.
To lower the rear seatback, follow these steps:
3. Move the seat rearward until it locks into place
after someone gets into the rear seat area.
4. Move the seatback to its original position and
make sure the seatback is locked.
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
You can fold either side of the rear seatback down for
more cargo space.
1. Open the trunk and pull one or both of the small
handles located in the center of the trunk.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
2. Push the seatback open through the trunk, or pull it
down from inside the vehicle.
2-9
To raise the rear seatback, lift it up and push rearward
until you hear a click. Push and pull on the seatback to
be sure it is locked into place.
{ WARNING:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
pull forward on the top of the seatback at the area
of the latch to be sure it is locked.
{ WARNING:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person wearing
the belt could be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
2-10
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This section of the manual describes how to use safety
belts properly. It also describes some things not to do
with safety belts.
{ WARNING:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
{ WARNING:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑20
for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
2-11
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
2-12
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
2-13
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
2-14
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on page 2‑31 or Infants
and Young Children on page 2‑34. Follow those rules
for everyone's protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
2-15
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the
vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and
you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
2-16
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
2-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
2-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
2-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
2-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
2-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
2-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
2-23
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
2. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the
Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may
affect the passenger sensing system, if equipped.
See Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo
Engine) on page 2‑62 or Passenger Sensing
System (With Turbo Engine) on page 2‑67 for
more information.
1. If the seat has a safety belt guide, and the safety
belt is not routed through the guide, slide the edge
of the belt webbing through the opening on the
guide. Be sure the belt is not twisted.
2-24
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 2‑30.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly if necessary.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap
belt on smaller occupants.
5. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instructions on use and important safety
information.
2-25
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
(Sedan Only)
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The
belt should return to its stowed position.
Press the release
button (A) and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position. The
adjuster can be moved up
by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle.
After the height adjuster is set to the desired position,
try to move it down without pressing the release button
to make sure it has locked into position.
2-26
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt:
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle
has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can
help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle's safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash on page 2‑75.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides. If not, they are available through your dealer/
retailer. The guides may provide added safety belt
comfort for older children who have outgrown booster
seats and for some adults. When installed and properly
adjusted, the comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
2-27
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
2-28
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
{ WARNING:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure that
the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so the safety belt can be removed
from the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its
storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop of
the elastic cord exposed.
2-29
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety Belt Extender
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
2-30
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/
retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use
it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child
seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For
more information, see the instruction sheet that comes
with the extender.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.
The manufacturer's instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
.
Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees
bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 2‑24 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
.
Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a
position with a lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
2-31
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑24.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out
of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts
properly.
2-32
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
2-33
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its
airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants
and young children ride in vehicles, they should have
the protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
2-34
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person's arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
WARNING: (Continued)
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
(Continued)
2-35
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle's owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's weight, height, and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer's instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
2-36
{ WARNING:
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with the
rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant's body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
{ WARNING:
A young child's hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child's body with
the harness.
2-37
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
2-38
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 2‑41 for more information. A child
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using
safety belts.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
{ WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
2-39
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
The vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
(Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing system,
if equipped, has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe.
No one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo
Engine) on page 2‑62 or Passenger Sensing
System (With Turbo Engine) on page 2‑67 for
additional information.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
2-40
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Lower Anchors
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH
system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle's
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
2-41
Top Tether Anchor
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top tether always to be
attached. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and
that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child restraint.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
2-42
Rear Seat
Each rear seating position has two exposed metal lower
anchors in the crease between the seatback and the
seat cushion.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
The top tether anchors are located under the covers on
the rear seatback filler panel. Open the cover to access
the anchor. Be sure to use an anchor located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position where
the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint on
page 2‑39 for additional information.
2-43
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System
{ WARNING:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to
secure the restraint, following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
{ WARNING:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could be
injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries during a crash, attach only one child
restraint per anchor.
{ WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint
has been installed.
2-44
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts
to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the
seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1. 1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1. 2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1. 3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
2. 1. Find the top tether anchor.
2. 2. Open the top tether anchor cover to expose
the anchor.
2. 3. If you have an adjustable headrest or head
restraint, raise the headrest or head restraint.
2. 4. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
2-45
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
headrest or head restraint
and route the tether under
the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
2-46
If the position you are
using has a fixed or
adjustable headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether, route
the tether around the
headrest or head
restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑41 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety
belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑41 for top
tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on
page 2‑39.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
2-47
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
necessary.
2-48
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑41 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
If your seat has a safety belt guide, return the safety
belt into the guide on the seatback by sliding the
webbing through the opening on the guide.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
2-49
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
The vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint .
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. See
Passenger Sensing System and Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator for more information on this, including
important safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
(Continued)
2-50
WARNING: (Continued)
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
The vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
Even if the passenger sensing system,
if equipped, has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe.
No one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo
Engine) on page 2‑62 or Passenger Sensing
System (With Turbo Engine) on page 2‑67 for
additional information.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) for how and
where to install the child restraint using LATCH. If a
child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses
a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) for top tether anchor locations.
4. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. If the seat has a safety belt guide, remove the
safety belt from the guide on the head restraint by
sliding the webbing through the opening on the
guide. Do not secure the child restraint with the
safety belt routed through the guide.
5. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-51
6. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
7. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2-52
If the vehicle is equipped with a passenger sensing
system, and the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System (Without
Turbo Engine) on page 2‑62 or Passenger Sensing
System (With Turbo Engine) on page 2‑67 for more
information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the seat has a safety belt guide, insert the safety belt
into the guide on the head restraint by sliding the
webbing through the opening on the guide.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
.
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger
Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right front
passenger.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
2-53
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from
the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very
quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ WARNING:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑58.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
2-54
{ WARNING:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
roof-rail airbags.
{ WARNING:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on
page 2‑31 or Infants and Young Children on
page 2‑34.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑21 for
more information.
2-55
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver's frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
2-56
The right front passenger's airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger's side.
{ WARNING:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
2-57
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest. However, they are
only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and
how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
.
.
2-58
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object that does not
deform.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
.
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has an electronic frontal
sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Your vehicle may have roof-rail airbags. See Airbag
System on page 2‑53. Roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. Roof-rail
airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the
system's designed threshold level. The threshold level
can vary with specific vehicle design.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.
A roof-rail airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what
the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity
of the side impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the
airbag module.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's
upper body.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑58 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the
vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
2-59
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some
components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑59.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
2-60
{ WARNING:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn off the interior
lamps and hazard warning flashers by using the
controls for those features.
{ WARNING:
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may
have also damaged important functions in the
vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and
steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears
to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may
be concealed damage that could make it difficult
to safely operate the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the
engine after a crash has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
.
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 8‑17 and Event Data Recorders on
page 8‑18.
.
Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
2-61
Passenger Sensing System
(Without Turbo Engine)
If the vehicle has one of the passenger airbag status
indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the
vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right
front passenger position. If equipped, the passenger
airbag status indicator is visible on the instrument panel
when the vehicle is started.
In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, the label
on the vehicle's sun visors refer to “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS”.
When the system check is complete, either the word
ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be
visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 4‑22.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag and roof-rail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are using
remote start to start the vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
2-62
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child
restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an
older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who
are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is
turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
.
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
.
The system determines that an infant is present in
a child restraint.
.
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑22.
The passenger sensing system is designed turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger seat. When
the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag
to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is active.
2-63
For some children, including children in child restraints,
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person's seating
posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑21
for more information, including important safety
information.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
2-64
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position on page 2‑50.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle
seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable,
to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints on
page 2‑7.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system may or may not
turn off the airbag for a child in a child restraint
depending upon the child's seating posture and
body build. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat,
such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
2-65
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well
the passenger sensing system operates. We
recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM
for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑73 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
2-66
A wet seat can affect the performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
.
The passenger sensing system may turn off the
passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into the
seat. If this happens, the off indicator will be lit,
and the airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel will also be lit.
.
Liquid pooled on the seat that has not soaked in
may make it more likely that the passenger
sensing system will enable (turn on) the passenger
airbag while a child restraint or child occupant is on
the seat. If the passenger airbag is turned on, the
on indicator will be lit.
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry the seat
immediately. If the airbag readiness light is lit, do not
install a child restraint or allow anyone to occupy the
seat. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑21 for
important safety information.
The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat.
If this is not desired, remove the object from the seat.
In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, the label
on the vehicle's sun visors refer to “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS”.
{ WARNING:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper operation
of the passenger sensing system.
United States
Passenger Sensing System
(With Turbo Engine)
If the vehicle has one of the passenger airbag status
indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the
vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right
front passenger position. If equipped, the passenger
airbag status indicator is visible on the instrument panel
when the vehicle is started.
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are using
remote start to start the vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON or
the word OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑22.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag and roof-rail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
2-67
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child
restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an
older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who
are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is
turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
2-68
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
.
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
.
The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
.
The system determines that a small child is
present in a child restraint.
.
The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
.
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
.
The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑22.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person's seating
posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑21
for more information, including important safety
information.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front passenger's seat.
2-69
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position on page 2‑50.
2-70
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle
seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable,
to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints on
page 2‑7.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and
check with your dealer/retailer.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat,
such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
2-71
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing the vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 8‑16.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM
for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑73 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
{ WARNING:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper operation
of the passenger sensing system.
2-72
{ WARNING:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change about
the vehicle that could keep the airbags from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle's
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, front sensors, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger
position, which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger's seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim,
or with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation of the passenger
sensing system. This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent
the passenger sensing system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System (Without Turbo Engine) on page 2‑62 or
Passenger Sensing System (With Turbo Engine) on
page 2‑67.
If you have any questions, call Customer
Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this
will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
2-73
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They
can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑20 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 6‑116.
2-74
Airbags
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4‑21 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑59. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{ WARNING:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not
being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑21.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary. But
the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
2-75
2 NOTES
2-76
Section 3
Features and Controls
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . .
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) . . .
Shifting Out of Park (Automatic
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking the Vehicle (Manual Transmission) . . . .
Parking Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16
3-16
3-18
3-18
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-23
3-23
3-25
3-26
3-28
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-34
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-1
Section 3
Features and Controls
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Manual Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Remote Control Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-38
3-38
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-39
3-39
3-39
3-39
3-39
3-39
3-39
Keys
{ WARNING:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store
this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be
sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑8.
3-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑19 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
.
Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left
or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
.
Check the transmitter's battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
.
If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
3-4
With Remote Start Shown,
Without Remote Start
Similar
/ (Remote Vehicle Start) : For vehicles with this
feature, press to start the engine from outside the
vehicle. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑6.
Q (Lock) : Press to lock all the doors. The interior
lamps turn off after all of the doors are closed.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the remote lock feedback can be programmed to have
the horn chirp and/or the turn signals flash to confirm
locking. See “LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4‑46.
V (Remote Trunk Release) : Press and hold for
approximately one second to open the trunk. The trunk
will open using the transmitter when the vehicle speed
is less than 2 mph (3 km/h) if the vehicle has a manual
transmission, when the ignition is off, or when the
vehicle shift lever is in P (Park) if the vehicle has an
automatic transmission.
Pressing Q may also arm the content theft-deterrent
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3‑16.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm) : Press to locate
the vehicle. The horn sounds three times and the
headlamps and turn signals flash three times.
K (Unlock) : Press to unlock the driver door. If K is
pressed again within five seconds, all remaining doors
unlock. The interior lamps turn on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled
through the DIC, the remote unlock feedback can be
programmed to have the horn chirp and/or the turn
signals flash to confirm unlocking. See “UNLOCK
HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑46.
The high-beam headlamps and parking lamps may turn
on when K is pressed. See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS”
under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4‑46.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content
theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 3‑16.
Press and hold L for approximately three seconds to
sound the panic alarm. The horn sounds and the
headlamps and turn signals flash for 30 seconds. Press
L again to cancel the panic alarm.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased and programmed through your dealer/
retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter is
programmed. Each vehicle can have up to four
transmitters programmed to it.
3-5
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT LOW
message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB BATT
LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑40.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from
your body could damage the transmitter.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote start feature. This
feature allows you to start the engine from outside the
vehicle. It may also start the vehicle's heating or air
conditioning systems. When you start your vehicle using
the remote start feature, the climate control system will
come on and adjust the interior to the temperature
settings that you left it set to when you turned the
vehicle off.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine
running time.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3-6
After your vehicle's engine has been started two times
using the remote vehicle start button, the vehicle's
ignition switch must be turned to ON/RUN and then
back to LOCK/OFF using the key before the remote
start procedure can be used again. See Ignition
Positions on page 3‑21 for information regarding the
ignition positions on your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range of
operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4 for additional
information.
/ (Remote Start):
This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature, do
the following:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release Q , then immediately press and
hold / until the vehicle's turn signal lamps flash.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the engine is running. The
vehicle's doors will be locked.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine
is running, to extend the time by 10 minutes for the
engine to continue to run.
After entering the vehicle after a remote start, insert and
turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been done or the vehicle's
key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to
ON/RUN.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following. The parking lamps will turn off to indicate the
engine is off.
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and release the remote start button.
.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
.
Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN and then
LOCK/OFF.
Your vehicle's engine can be started two times, per
ignition cycle, using the transmitter's remote start
feature.
If the remote start procedure is used again before the
first 10 minute time frame has ended, the first
10 minutes will immediately expire and the second
10 minute time frame will start.
3-7
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the follow occur:
.
The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.
.
The vehicle's key is in the ignition.
.
The vehicle's hood is open.
.
The hazard warning flashers are on.
.
The check engine light is on. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4‑27.
.
The engine coolant temperature is too high.
.
The oil pressure is low.
.
Two remote vehicle starts have already been
provided for that ignition cycle.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote start system
enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled
through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 4‑46 for additional
information.
3-8
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{ WARNING:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
.
Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will
not open it. The chance of being thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors
are not locked. So, all passengers should
wear safety belts properly and the doors
should be locked whenever the vehicle is
driven.
(Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
.
Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
To lock the driver's door from the outside, turn the key
clockwise. To unlock the door, turn the key
counterclockwise.
Power Door Locks
This vehicle may have
power door locks. The
controls are located on
the driver and front
passenger door armrest.
Driver Switch shown
K to unlock the doors.
Press Q to lock the doors.
Press
You can also use the remote keyless entry transmitter,
if equipped, to lock and unlock the doors.
From the inside, use the manual lock knobs on each
door or the power door lock switch to lock and unlock
all doors.
3-9
Delayed Locking
Automatic Door Lock
If your vehicle has power locks, it will have the delayed
locking feature.
On vehicles with power door locks, the doors
automatically lock when the shift lever is moved out
of (P) Park for a vehicle with an automatic transmission.
For a vehicle with a manual transmission, the speed
must be greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
This feature will delay the actual locking of the doors for
up to five seconds when the power door lock switch or
remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the
vehicle.
If any door is open when locking the vehicle, three
chimes will sound signaling that the delayed locking
feature is active. Five seconds after the last door is
closed, all of the doors will lock and the turn signal
lamps will flash. To cancel the delay and lock the doors
immediately, press the lock button a second time.
This feature will not lock the doors if the key is in the
ignition .
You can disable this function through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑46.
3-10
The automatic door locking feature cannot be disabled.
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
If your vehicle has power locks, it has a programmable
automatic door unlock feature.
The doors can be programmed through the Driver
Information Center (DIC) to automatically unlock several
ways. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4‑46
for more information.
Rear Door Security Locks (Sedan)
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from
the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each rear
door. You must open the
rear doors to access
them. The label showing
lock and unlock positions
is located near the lock.
Security Lock Label shown
To set the locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the power door
lock switch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
Lockout Protection
If your vehicle has power door locks, it will have this
feature. If you press the power door lock switch when
the key is in the ignition and any door is open, all the
doors will lock and the driver's door will unlock. Be sure
to remove the key from the ignition when locking your
vehicle.
The lockout protection can be overridden by pressing
and holding the power door lock in the lock position for
three seconds.
2. Close the door.
3-11
Trunk
To release the trunk lid from the outside, use the key or
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
if equipped.
{ WARNING:
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
(Continued)
3-12
WARNING: (Continued)
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate,
or trunk/hatch open:
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑35.
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
To open the trunk from
inside the vehicle, press
the remote trunk release
button. It is located inside
the driver storage
compartment on the lower
left side of the instrument
panel .
On a manual transmission equipped vehicle, the remote
trunk release works when the ignition is either off or in
ACC/ACCESSORY, or the vehicle speed is less than
2 mph (3 km/h).
On an automatic transmission equipped vehicle, the
remote trunk release works when the shifter is in
P (Park).
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the inside of the trunk lid of the
vehicle. This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle and push the trunk lid
open from the inside to open the trunk.
3-13
Windows
{ WARNING:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
Manual Windows
If your vehicle has manual windows, use the window
crank to open and close each window.
3-14
Power Windows
If your vehicle has power
windows, the switches on
the driver's door armrest
control each of the
windows.
{ WARNING:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do
not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Sedan Shown,
Coupe Similar
In addition, each passenger's door has a window switch
that controls that door's window. Press the front of the
switch to open the window. Pull the front of the switch
up to close it.
Express-Down Window
The driver's window switch has an express-down
feature which allows the window to be lowered fully
without continuously pressing the switch. This switch is
labeled AUTO. Press the front of the switch to the first
position, and the driver's window will open a small
amount. Press the switch down fully and release. The
window goes all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front of
the switch up.
3-15
Window Lockout (Sedan)
Theft-Deterrent Systems
o (Window Lockout) : The driver's window controls
also include a lockout switch. Press the right side of the
switch to prevent the rear passengers from using their
window switches. The driver can still control all the
windows with the lockout on. Press the switch to the left
to return to normal window operation. A red bar on the
right side of the switch indicates that the lockout feature
is off.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they
do not make it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, swing down the visor(s). The visors
can also be detached from the center mount and swung
to the side to cover the windows.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle may have a driver's side vanity mirror.
Swing down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose
the mirror.
Arming the System
With the ignition off, you can arm the system by
pressing the remote keyless entry transmitter lock
button.
The system will arm after either of these things occur:
3-16
.
Thirty seconds after all the doors are closed.
.
Sixty seconds with any door open.
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second
time while all the doors are closed, the system will arm
immediately. The system will still arm in 60 seconds if a
door is open. When the open door is closed, it will also
become armed.
The security light, located on the instrument panel
cluster, will turn on to indicate that arming has been
initiated. Once the system is armed, the security light
will flash once every three seconds.
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this
means that a door is open.
If you do not want to arm the system, you may lock the
car with the manual lock knobs, or the power door lock
switch, if equipped, on the doors.
Disarming the System
You can disarm the system by doing any one of the
following:
.
Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock
button.
.
Turn the ignition on.
If the system is armed and the trunk is opened using
the trunk release button on the transmitter, the system
will temporarily disarm itself and re-arm when the trunk
has been closed. This allows you to exit the vehicle,
lock the doors using the transmitter, and open the trunk
using the transmitter without having to disarm and
re-arm the system.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will stop
flashing.
How the System Alarm is Activated
If the system is armed, it can be activated by either:
.
Opening the driver's door or trunk. This will cause
a ten second pre-alarm chirp followed by a thirty
second full alarm of horn and lights.
.
Opening any other door. This will immediately
cause a full alarm of horn and lights for thirty
seconds.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will
re-arm itself automatically.
3-17
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
To turn off the system alarm, do one of the following:
.
Press the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The system will then re-arm itself.
.
Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter. This will also disarm the system.
.
Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This will
also disarm the system.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If you hear three chirps when you press the unlock,
lock, or trunk release buttons on the remote keyless
transmitter, it means that the content theft security
system alarm was previously activated.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑19 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
3-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem with
arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, there may be a
problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 6‑121. If the engine still does
not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service.
If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty.
See your dealer/retailer who can service the
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑8, for more
information.
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to
“learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost
or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the system.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
To program the new key:
1. Verify that the new key has a
1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start, see
your dealer/retailer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to LOCK/
OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the
ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original
key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however, is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
3-19
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
the new brake linings are not yet broken in.
Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.
.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer (Automatic Transmission)
on page 5‑33 or Towing a Trailer (Manual
Transmission) on page 5‑39 for the trailer
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
.
3-20
Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast
or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do
not make full-throttle starts. Do not exceed
5,000 engine rpm. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
Ignition Positions
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF.
On vehicles with a manual transmission, the ignition
switch can be turned to LOCK/OFF in any shift lever
position.
The steering can bind with the wheel turned off center.
If this happens, move it from right to left while turning
the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,
then the vehicle needs service.
{ WARNING:
The ignition switch has four different positions.
In order to shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal
must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
If you have a manual transmission removing the
key from the ignition switch will lock the steering
column and result in a loss of ability to steer the
vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need
to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving,
turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY) : This position operates
some of the electrical accessories. It unlocks the
steering wheel and ignition.
9 (LOCK/OFF) : This position locks the steering
column when the key is removed. The key can only be
removed in LOCK/OFF.
3-21
R (ON/RUN) : This is the position in which you can
operate the electrical accessories and to display some
instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights.
The switch stays in this position when the engine is
running.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/
RUN position with the engine off, the battery could be
drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle if the
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
Column Lock Release
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, the
following procedure allows the ignition to be turned to
LOCK/OFF and ignition key to be removed in case of a
dead battery or low voltage battery.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in P (Park).
/ (START) : This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to ON/RUN for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
opened, the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the key is in the ignition.
2. Remove the cover from the bottom of the steering
column.
3-22
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories may be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off.
.
Audio System
.
Power Windows, if equipped
.
Sunroof, if equipped
The power windows and sunroof will continue to work
for up to 10 minutes or until any door is opened. The
radio will work when the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from ON/RUN to
OFF/LOCK, the radio will continue to work for
10 minutes or until the driver's door is opened.
3. Locate the plunger.
4. Press and hold the plunger while turning the
ignition key to LOCK/OFF. Remove the key.
Have the vehicle serviced at your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible.
Starting the Engine
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
Automatic Transmission
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The
engine will not start in any other position. To restart the
vehicle when it is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle is
moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle
is stopped.
3-23
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in N (Neutral) and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to the floor
and start the engine. The vehicle will not start if the
clutch pedal is not all the way down.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as the
engine warms. Do not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position, and then released
when the engine begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the
key is held in START for many seconds, cranking
will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage,
this system also prevents cranking if the engine is
already running. Engine cranking can be stopped
by turning the ignition switch to ACC/ACCESSORY
or LOCK/OFF.
3-24
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool. When the engine starts, let go of the
key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, repeat the procedure. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms
up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer/retailer. If you do
not, the engine might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather condition at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with am engine coolant heater should be plugged in at
least four hours before starting. An internal thermostat
in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above
0°F (−18°C).
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
electrical cord is located on the passenger side of
the vehicle between the strut and the air cleaner/
filter.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{ WARNING:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away from
moving engine parts, and prevent damaged.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in the
area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best
advice on this.
3-25
Automatic Transmission Operation
If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, the shift
lever is located on the console between the seats.
{ WARNING:
There are several
different positions for the
automatic transmission.
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
P (Park) : This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when starting the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 3‑32.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transmission) on page 5‑33 or
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on
page 5‑39.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply the regular brakes first and then press the shift
lever button before the vehicle can shift from P (Park)
3-26
when the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If the vehicle
cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
lever and push the shift lever all the way into P (Park)
as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift
lever button and then move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of Park (Automatic Transmission)
on page 3‑33.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
R (Reverse) : Use this gear to back up.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 5‑24.
N (Neutral) : In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the
vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,
use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
{ WARNING:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive) : This position is for normal driving with the
automatic transmission. It provides the best fuel
economy. If you need more power for passing and
you are:
.
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator all the way down.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under
Loss of Control on page 5‑16.
3-27
I (Intermediate) : This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without using
the brakes for slight downgrades where the vehicle
would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade.
If constant upshifting or downshifting occurs while
driving up steep hills, this position can be used to
prevent repetitive types of shifts. You might choose
I (Intermediate) instead of D (Drive) when driving on
hilly, winding roads and when towing a trailer, so that
there is less shifting between gears.
L (Low) : This position reduces vehicle speed more
than I (Intermediate) without actually using the brakes.
You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or
mud. If the shift lever is put in L (Low), the transmission
will not shift into a low gear until the vehicle is going
slowly enough.
Manual Transmission Operation
This is the shift pattern for standard models.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
This is the shift pattern for SS models.
3-28
Here is how to operate the manual transmission:
Notice: Do not rest your hand on the shift lever
while driving. The pressure could cause premature
wear in the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
1 (First) : Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
You can shift into 1 (First) when the vehicle is traveling
less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a
complete stop and it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put the
shift lever in N (Neutral) and let up on the clutch pedal.
Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into
1 (First).
2 (Second) : Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into 2 (Second). Then,
slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth) : Shift into 3 (Third),
4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth) the same way you do for
2 (Second). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator pedal down.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
N (Neutral).
N (Neutral) : Use this position when you start or idle
the engine.
R (Reverse) : To back up, press down the clutch pedal
and shift into R (Reverse).
For SS models, lift upwards on the ring located on the
underside of the shift knob to shift into R (Reverse).
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
Also, use R (Reverse), along with the parking brake, for
parking the vehicle.
3-29
Shift Speeds
No-Lift Upshift (SS Models)
{ WARNING:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could
lose control of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift down more than
one gear at a time when you downshift.
Up-Shift Light
If the vehicle has a
manual transmission,
there may be an up-shift
light. This light will show
you when to shift to the
next higher gear for the
best fuel economy.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions let
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and
shift when the light comes on.
While accelerating, it is normal for the light to go on and
off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator.
Ignore the light when downshifting.
3-30
If the vehicle has the 2.0L turbo engine and manual
transmission, it has the capability of No-Lift Upshifts.
This feature maximizes vehicle acceleration by allowing
you to shift the transmission to a higher gear without
taking your foot off the accelerator. No-Lift Upshifting is
enabled in all Electronic Stability Control modes. See
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑6 for
more information. Use this feature only when the engine
has reached normal operating temperature. Correct
shifting allows the engine to maintain boost pressure
during shifts, while also keeping the engine from
over-revving.
To utilize this feature:
1. Accelerate the vehicle by fully depressing the
accelerator pedal.
2. Just prior to reaching the maximum engine speed,
quickly complete the upshift utilizing the clutch
while keeping the accelerator pedal fully applied.
A quicker shift maneuver gives the best
performance. If the engine is operated at the
maximum engine speed for greater than
one second, the engine exits the No-Lift Upshift
mode and resumes normal engine overspeed
protection.
Parking Brake
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
press the release button. Hold the release button in as
you move the brake lever all the way down.
If you forget to release your parking brake, a chime will
sound and the PARKING BRAKE message will appear
along with the brake system warning light when the
parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving
faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑40.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before driving.
Automatic Shown, Manual Similar
The parking brake lever is located between the front
seats.
For vehicles equipped with an armrest, lift the console
armrest in order to access the parking brake lever.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑23.
3-31
Shifting Into Park
(Automatic Transmission)
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
{ WARNING:
{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transmission) on page 5‑33 or
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on
page 5‑39.
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat
and even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine
running.
To shift into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑31 for more
information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
3-32
If you have to leave an automatic transmission vehicle
with the engine running, be sure the vehicle is in
P (Park) and the parking brake is firmly set before you
leave it. After you have moved the shift lever into
P (Park), hold the brake pedal down. Then, see if you
can move the shift lever away from P (Park) without first
pushing the button. If you can, it means that the shift
lever was not fully locked into P (Park).
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift into
P (Park) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too
much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You
may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set
the parking brake and then shift into P (Park) properly
before you leave the driver seat. To find out how, see
Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) on
page 3‑32.
Move the shift lever out of P (Park) before you release
the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
Shifting Out of Park
(Automatic Transmission)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
.
Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever
is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
.
Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park)
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is
applied.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of a an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
See Jump Starting on page 6‑40 for more information.
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
3-33
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
Parking Over Things That Burn
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Parking the Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
Before leaving the vehicle, fully press the clutch pedal
down, move the shift lever into R (Reverse), and firmly
apply the parking brake. Once the shift lever has been
placed in R (Reverse) with the clutch pedal pressed
down, the ignition key can be turned to LOCK/OFF, then
remove the key and release the clutch pedal. See
Manual Transmission Operation on page 3‑28.
3-34
{ WARNING:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
Engine Exhaust
{ WARNING:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.
The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
.
The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
.
The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
.
The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
.
There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
(Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.
Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
3-35
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{ WARNING:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or
smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area
that has no fresh air ventilation. For more
information, see Engine Exhaust on page 3‑35.
{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The
vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking
brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission)
on page 3‑32.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer (Automatic Transmission) on page 5‑33 or
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on page 5‑39.
3-36
Mirrors
Outside Manual Mirror
Manual Rearview Mirror
Adjust the outside mirror just to see the side of your
vehicle and have a clear view of objects behind you.
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view of behind your vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you.
Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer/retailer for more information on the system and
how to subscribe to OnStar®. See the OnStar® owner's
guide for more information about the services OnStar ®
provides.
If the vehicle has map lamps, press the buttons located
at the bottom of the mirror to turn them on or off.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pull
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return it to the original position.
Outside Remote Control Mirror
Adjust the driver outside mirror with the control lever
located on the driver door. Adjust the outside mirrors so
that the side of the vehicle can be seen.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pull
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return it to the original position.
3-37
Outside Power Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door
armrest.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pull
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return it to the original position.
Outside Convex Mirror
{ WARNING:
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Move the selector switch located below the
four-way control pad to the left or right to choose
either the driver or passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
3-38
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver seat.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
Cupholders
There are two cupholders located at the front of the
center console, in front of the shift lever. These
cupholders have a liner that can be removed for
cleaning or to accommodate larger cup sizes. There are
also cupholders for the rear seat passengers located at
the rear of the center console.
Convenience Net
For vehickes with a convenience net, it is located in the
rear. Use it to store small loads as far forward as
possible. The net should not be used to store heavy
loads.
Sunroof
On vehicles with a
sunroof, the switch that
operates it is located on
the headliner between the
map lamps.
Center Console Storage
For vehicles with a center console storage area, open
with the lever on the front of the console.
Driver Storage Compartment
The driver's storage compartment is located near the
left side of the steering column on the bottom of the
instrument panel. Pull the cover down to open.
The sunroof will only operate while the ignition is on,
or turned to ACC/ACCESSORY, or if Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3‑23.
3-39
Press the sunroof switch rearward to open the sunroof
to the vent position. If the sunshade is closed, it must
be opened manually in the vent position. Press and
hold the switch rearward a second time to open the
sunroof. If the sunshade is closed, it will open
automatically when the sunroof is opened.
Notice: Forcing the sunshade forward of the sliding
glass panel may cause damage and the sunroof
may not operate properly. Always close the glass
panel before closing the sunshade.
To close the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold
it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if the
switch is released. Close the sunshade by hand.
Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time.
Debris may collect in the tracks and possibly damage
the sunroof and plug the water draining system.
3-40
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
the vehicle has an electrical failure.
Section 4
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Wiper Activated Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Headlamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Instrument Panel Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Mirror Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Battery Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Accessory Power Outlet(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light . . .
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Indicator/
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light . . . .
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14
4-14
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-20
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-27
4-1
Section 4
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boost Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reconfigurable Performance Display (RPD) . . .
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIC Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Instrument Panel
4-30
4-30
4-30
4-31
4-31
4-32
4-32
4-37
4-38
4-40
4-46
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using an MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . .
4-52
4-53
4-54
4-66
4-72
4-74
4-84
4-84
4-85
4-86
4-86
Instrument Panel Overview
Tilt Wheel
Hazard Warning Flashers
| (Hazard Warning Flasher) : Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press
| again to turn the flashers off.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering
wheel.
The tilt wheel lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down into a
comfortable position.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in
place.
4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the following:
G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals
5 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
O : Exterior Lamp Control
Flash-to-Pass.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
4-4
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change
is complete.
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows
flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be
burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 6‑121.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal lever away from you.
This indicator light
appears on the instrument
panel cluster when the
high beams are on.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
The windshield wiper lever is on the right side of the
steering column.
Flash-to-Pass
Move the lever to control the windshield wipers.
To signal to a driver in front of you that you want to
pass, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever until the
high-beam headlamps come on. Then release the lever
to turn them off.
9 (Off) : Turns the windshield wipers off.
& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers) : For
intermittent or speed sensitive operation. The amount of
delay time varies between wiping cycles due to the
delay setting selected or the speed of the vehicle.
As vehicle speed is increased or decreased, the wiper
interval also increases or decreases.
4-5
x (Delay) : Move the lever to the & position, then
turn the x band up for more frequent wipes or down
for less frequent wipes.
Windshield Washer
Press the button at the end of the windshield wiper
lever until the washers begin.
6 (Low Speed) : Slow wipes.
1 (High Speed) : Fast wipes.
8 (Mist) : Single wipe, move the lever down, then
release it. Several wipes, hold the lever down.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before
using them.
If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw
them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker stops the motor until it cools. If the
motor gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away the
snow or ice, and then turn the wipers back on.
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for
more than 15 seconds, the vehicle's headlamps turn on
automatically. They turn off 15 seconds after the wipers
are turned off.
{ WARNING:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
When the button is released, the washers stop, but the
wipers continue to wipe about three times or resume the
previous speed.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below 40 km/h (25 mph).
The brake must be applied at least one time, after the
vehicle has been started, before cruise control will
function.
4-6
{ WARNING:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
{ WARNING:
The cruise control buttons
are located on the
outboard side of the
steering wheel.
J (On/Off) : Press to turn the cruise control system
on and off.
RES+ (Resume) : Press to resume a set speed and to
accelerate the speed.
SET– (Set) : Press to set a speed and to decrease
the speed.
To set a speed do the following:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
1. Press J to turn the cruise control on.
The indicator light on the button will come on.
2. Get to the speed desired.
3. Press the SET– part of the control button and
release it. The CRUISE ENGAGED message will
appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to
show the system is engaged.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
4-7
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed
and then the brake is applied. This disengages the
cruise control. To return to the previously set speed,
you do not need to go through the set process again.
Once the vehicle is traveling at least 40 km/h (25 mph)
or more, press the RES+ part of the button briefly.
The vehicle returns to the previously selected speed
and stays there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
1. Disengage the cruise control by applying the brake
pedal, but do not turn it off. Accelerate to a higher
speed and reset the cruise control.
2. If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the RES+ part of the button. Hold it there
until you get up to the speed desired, and then
release the button. To increase the vehicle speed
in very small amounts, press the RES+ part of the
button briefly and then release it. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph)
faster.
4-8
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control system is already engaged,
.
Push and hold the SET– part of the button until the
lower speed desired is reached, then release it.
.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the
SET– part of the button briefly. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph)
slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle's
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you
set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle's
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle's speed
down. Applying the brake will turn off the cruise control.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to end cruise control:
.
.
Step lightly on the brake pedal or the clutch pedal
if the vehicle has a manual transmission. This will
only end the current cruise control session.
Press
J to turn the system completely off.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
Headlamps
The exterior lamp switch has the following four
positions:
2 (Headlamps) : Turns on the headlamps, parking
lamps, and taillamps.
; (Parking Lamps) : Turns on the parking lamps and
taillamps only.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System) : Automatically
turns on the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) during
daytime, and the headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps at night. This position must be selected in
order for the Wiper Activated Headlamps to be
activated. See Wiper Activated Headlamps on
page 4‑10.
P (Off/On) : When operating in AUTO, a momentary
turn of the switch to Off/On will turn the Automatic
Headlamp System off or back on. For vehicles first sold
in Canada, the automatic transmission must be in
P (Park) or the manual transmission must have the
park brake set, before the Automatic Headlamp System
can be turned off.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
4-9
Wiper Activated Headlamps
The headlamps and parking lamps are activated
15 seconds after the windshield wipers are turned on.
For this feature to work, automatic lighting must be
enabled. See Headlamps on page 4‑9 for additional
information.
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They also turn off
15 seconds after the windshield wiper control is
turned off.
Headlamps on Reminder
If the drivers door is opened with the ignition off and the
lamps on, a warning chime will sound. This indicates
that the headlamps are still on.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in
Canada. The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the
instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered, or the
head lamps will be on when not needed.
4-10
The DRL system will make the headlamps come on
when the following conditions are met:
.
The ignition is on.
.
The exterior lamps control is in AUTO or the
parking lamps only position.
.
The light sensor detects daytime light.
.
The parking brake is released.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps, and instrument panel lights will
not be illuminated unless you have turned the exterior
lamps control to the parking lamp position.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Fog Lamps
For vehicles with fog lamps, the button is located on the
instrument panel, to the left of the steering wheel.
The ignition must be on to use the fog lamps.
# : Press to turn the fog lamps on off. An indicator
light on the button comes on when the fog lamps
are on.
The parking lamps automatically turn on and off when
the fog lamps are turned on and off.
Dome Lamp
The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beam
headlamps are turned on.
Move the lever to the following positions:
The vehicle may have a dome lamp.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
9 (Off) : Turns the lamp off, even when a door is
opened.
Instrument Panel Brightness
1 (Door) : Turns the lamp on whenever a door is
opened.
The control for this feature
is located on the
instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.
Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or
counterclockwise to dim the instrument panel lights,
when the parking lamps or headlamps are on.
+ (On) : Turns the dome lamp on.
Entry/Exit Lighting
The lamps inside the vehicle will go on when any door
is opened. These lamps fade out about 20 seconds
after all of the doors have been closed or when the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN. These lamps will also go
on when pressing the trunk release, unlock symbol,
or the horn symbol button on the Remote Keyless Entry
System (RKE) Transmitter.
After the key is removed from the ignition, the lamps
inside the vehicle stay on for about 20 seconds to
provide an illuminated exit.
Mirror Reading Lamps
The vehicle may have reading lamps on the rearview
mirror. Press the button near each lamp to turn the
reading lamps on and off.
4-11
Electric Power Management
This vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM), an
advanced control system. It estimates the battery's
temperature and state of charge and then adjusts the
voltage for best performance and extended life of the
battery.
When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gage or voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads,
and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase
4-12
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver.
Battery Run-Down Protection
The vehicle has a battery saver feature designed to
protect the vehicle's battery.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system
automatically turns the lamp off after 20 minutes.
This prevents draining of the battery.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
The accessory power outlet is located in the center
console, rearward of the shift lever.
To use the accessory power outlet, remove the cover.
When not in use, always cover the accessory power
outlet with the protective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do not
plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory power outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
The vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
To use the lighter, located on the instrument panel
below the climate controls, push it in all the way and
let go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
15 amperes.
To clean the center console ashtray, remove the entire
ashtray and empty it.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are
put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
4-13
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
9 (Off) : Turn the fan control to this position to turn
the fan off.
Temperature Control : Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature.
9 (Fan Control) : Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. In any setting
other than off, the fan will run continuously with the
ignition on. The fan must be turned on to run the air
conditioning compressor.
Air Delivery Mode Control : Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow
inside the vehicle.
Select from the following modes:
Vehicles with Air Conditioning shown,
without Air Conditioning similar
A. Air Delivery Mode Control
B. Fan Control
C. Temperature Control
D. Air Conditioning
E. Rear Window Defogger
F. Recirculation
4-14
H (Vent) : Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
) (Bi-Level) : Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and the floor outlets. Cooler air is directed
to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor) : Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some air directed to the windshield and side windows.
- (Defog) : This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, side window,
and floor outlets. To defog the windows faster, turn the
temperature control knob clockwise to the warmest
setting. In this mode, the system runs the air
conditioning compressor.
0 (Defrost) : This mode removes fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield, with some air directed to the side window
outlets and the floor outlets. To defrost the windows
faster, turn the temperature control knob clockwise to
the warmest setting. In this mode, the system runs the
air conditioning compressor.
For best results, clear all snow and ice from the
windshield before defrosting.
# (Air Conditioning) : For vehicles with air
conditioning, press this button to turn the air
conditioning system on or off. An indicator light comes
on to show that the air conditioning is on.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days:
H mode.
Select the h mode.
Select # .
1. Select the
2.
3.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in the
vehicle has cooled, turn off the recirculation by pressing
the button again.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
The air conditioning compressor cannot be turned on
when the fan is off.
h (Recirculation) : Press to turn the recirculation
mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that
recirculation is on.
This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air
inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
4-15
The air conditioning compressor also comes on.
Recirculation is not available for floor, defog and defrost
modes. If recirculation is selected in any of these
modes, the recirculate indicator light flashes five times
and outside air will be delivered. Operation in this mode
during periods of high humidity and cool outside
temperatures may result in increased window fogging.
If window fogging is experienced, select the
defrost mode.
Outside Air : This mode allows outside air to circulate
through the vehicle. This mode is automatically active if
recirculate is not selected. There is no button for
outside air.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
turning off. If the vehicle is moving faster than 50 mph
(80 kph), the rear defogger will stay on. The defogger
can also be turned off by turning off the engine.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the thumbwheels located next to and below the air
outlets to change the direction of the airflow and to
open and close the outlets.
Operation Tips
.
Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may block
the flow of air into the vehicle.
.
Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
.
Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle
more effectively.
The rear window defogger only works when the ignition
is in ON/RUN.
< (Rear) : Press to turn the rear window defogger on
or off. Be sure to clear as much snow from the rear
window as possible. An indicator light comes on to
show that the rear window defogger is on.
The rear window defogger turns off about 15 minutes
after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the
defogger only runs for about seven minutes before
4-16
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The filter removes dust and pollen from the air which is
drawn into the vehicle. Airflow reduction is an indication
that the filter needs to be replaced.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3 for replacement intervals. To find out
what type of filter to use, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 7‑13.
To access the passenger compartment air filter:
1. Open and empty the glove box.
3. Pull the tab at the back of the glove box toward
you and open the passenger compartment air filter
door downward.
2. Lower the glove box door by pressing in on each
side and lowering from the track.
4-17
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there might be or there is
a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
4. Pull the filter out toward you.
Install the new air filter with the AIR FLOW arrow
pointing downward. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reassemble.
4-18
Gages can indicate when there might be or there is a
problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to indicate a problem
with the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
could be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,
about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.
United States SS, Manual Transmission Cluster shown, Canada, Base and Automatic Transmission similar
4-19
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer shows the speed in both kilometers
per hour (km/h) and miles per hour (mph).
Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light
The vehicle's odometer works together with the Driver
Information Center (DIC). Trip A and Trip B can be set
on the odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4‑38.
The vehicle does not have to be running to check the
odometer mileage. Simply open the driver's door and
the mileage briefly displays.
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for several
seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt,
unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light
comes on and stays on
for several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
If the vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct total mileage of the
old odometer.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Notice: If the engine is operated with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, the vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not operate the
engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
4-20
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
For vehicles equipped with the passenger safety belt
reminder light, several seconds after the engine is
started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind
the front passenger to buckle their safety belt. The
passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and
then flashes for several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag's electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on page 2‑53.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also
come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑40 for more information.
4-21
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If the vehicle has one of the passenger airbag status
indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the
vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right
front passenger position. The passenger airbag status
indicator, if equipped, is on the instrument panel. See
Passenger Sensing System (Without Turbo Engine) on
page 2‑62 or Passenger Sensing System (With Turbo
Engine) on page 2‑67 for important safety information.
In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, the label
on the vehicle's sun visors refer to “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS”.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger frontal
airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{ WARNING:
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for
on and off, for several seconds as a system check.
If using remote start, if equipped, to start the vehicle
from a distance, you may not see the system check.
4-22
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑21
for more information, including important safety
information.
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition is turned
on, and the engine is not
running, as a check to
show it is working. Then it
should go out when the
engine is started.
If the light stays on, or comes on while driving, there
may be a problem with the electrical charging system.
Have it checked by your dealer/retailer. Driving while
this light is on could drain the battery.
When this light comes on, shift to the next higher gear if
weather, road, and traffic conditions allow.
See Manual Transmission Operation on page 3‑28 for
more information.
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle's hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking both
parts need to be working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.
If a short distance must be driven with the light on, turn
off all accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
Up-Shift Light
The vehicle may have an
up-shift light.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when the engine is
started. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn if there is a problem.
4-23
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
also comes on when the parking brake is set. The light
stays on if the parking brake does not fully release.
If it stays on after the parking brake is fully released,
it means the vehicle has a brake problem.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully. Make sure the parking brake is fully
released. The pedal might be harder to push or, the
pedal could go closer to the floor. It can take longer to
stop. Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one or
two times, if the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑30.
{ WARNING:
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is
started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on, the
vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 4‑23.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40 for all
brake related DIC messages.
4-24
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Indicator/Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Enhanced Traction
System (ETS), this light
serves as an indicator
and warning light.
This light comes on briefly while the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
If the indicator/warning light is on and not flashing, the
ETS system could have been disabled. Check all
related Driver Information Center (DIC) messages to
determine whether the system has been turned off or if
the system is not working properly and the vehicle
requires service. If the ETS has been disabled, wheel
spin is not limited.
See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 5‑12
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40 for
more information.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system or the
Traction Control System
(TCS), the indicator/
warning light comes on
briefly when the engine is
started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light goes off.
If this light is on while certain DIC messages display,
this indicates that the ESC and TCS are not working or
are disabled.
If the indicator/warning light is on and flashing, the ETS
is actively working. The LOW TRACTION DIC message
also appears when the system is actively limiting
wheel spin.
4-25
If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS and
potentially the ESC system have been disabled. Check
the DIC messaging to determine which feature(s) is no
longer functioning and whether it is because of the
driver turning off the feature(s), or because the system
is not working properly and the vehicle requires service.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This light comes on briefly
while starting the vehicle.
If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is not limited. If the
ESC system is disabled, the system does not aid in
maintaining directional control of the vehicle.
If the indicator/warning light is on and flashing, the TCS
or the ESC system is actively working. Check the DIC
messaging for details to determine which system is
working. If the LOW TRACTION message appears,
the system is limiting wheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVE
message appears, the system is aiding in maintaining
directional control of the vehicle.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑6
and Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑9 for
more information.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40 for
more information on the messages associated with
this light.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light goes off.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause the vehicle to
overheat. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑33.
The vehicle's engine could be damaged, and it
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never
drive with the engine coolant temperature warning
light on.
The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on
when the engine has overheated.
If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑33 for
more information.
4-26
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started. It provides
information about tire
pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring
System.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires are
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑37 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
pressure. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑63
for more information.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a
minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6‑66 for more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show it is working. If it
does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
4-27
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light can
prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This
system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
See Accessories and Modifications on page 6‑4.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing : A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control system on the
vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required.
4-28
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps and see your dealer/retailer for service
as soon as possible.
Light On Steady : An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
.
Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 6‑10. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
.
.
If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling after
start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed
into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one full
tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 6‑7.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
.
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on with the engine running,
or if the key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
.
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if the battery has
recently been replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take several days of
routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
4-29
Oil Pressure Light
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other
system problem.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle's
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 3‑16.
{ WARNING:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps
are in use.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it
does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
4-30
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 4‑10 for more information.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with the fuel gage:
.
At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took
a little more or less than half the tank's capacity to
fill the tank.
.
The gage moves a little while turning a corner or
speeding up.
.
The gage does not go back to empty when the
ignition is turned off.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4‑5
for more information.
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage shows
about how much fuel the
vehicle has left.
For the fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑128.
4-31
Boost Gage
This gage is automatically centered at zero every time
the engine is started. Actual vacuum or boost is
displayed from this zero point. Changes in ambient
pressure, such as driving in mountains and changing
weather, will slightly change the zero reading.
Reconfigurable Performance
Display (RPD)
United States
Canada
If equipped, this gage is located near the driver side of
the instrument panel cluster.
This gage indicates vacuum during light to moderate
throttle and boost under heavier throttle.
This gage displays the air pressure level in the intake
manifold before it enters the engine's combustion
chamber.
4-32
For vehicles with the RPD, the screen displays
information that can be used to monitor vehicle
performance. The RPD knob located next to the screen
is used to configure the display and select information
to be viewed.
A short video plays whenever the ignition key is turned
on. Press the RPD knob to stop the video and go
directly to RPD displays.
Region A Gage and Speedometer
Displays
Change the information displayed in Region A by
turning the knob either clockwise or counterclockwise.
The available gages are:
BOOST : Displays positive boost pressure as
determined by the manifold air pressure (MAP) sensor.
AIR/FUEL RATIO : Displays the mass ratio of air
to fuel.
RPD Screen Example US Version Shown, Canada
Similar (French Display Currently Not Available)
The RPD screen displays two divided areas (A, B) of
information called Regions. Advance through Region A
screens to show various gages and speedometer
displays. Advance through Region B screens to show
digital readouts and indicator information.
The position of these regions can be reversed. See the
SETUP MENU for more information.
When the ignition is turned off and then back on, the
RPD shows the last screen displayed.
CAM PHASER ANGLES : Displays orientation of the
intake and exhaust cam shafts relative to their park
positions as commanded by the engine control module.
OVERLAP represents the total distance the intake and
exhaust cam shafts have phased.
SPARK ADVANCE/ KNOCK RETARD : The spark
advance gage displays ignition timing. Knock retard
indicates the amount of ignition delay to reduce spark
knock.
ENGINE POWER & TORQUE : Displayed engine
power and torque are engine flywheel output values
calculated by the engine control module. These values
are approximate and may change with the air
conditioning load, generator output, air temperature, air
pressure, and fuel octane.
4-33
SPEEDOMETER & G FORCE : The G FORCE meter
displays lateral acceleration. While turning right, G
forces are felt on the left, and vice versa. PEAK values
are stored indefinitely, and can be reset with a press
and hold of the RPD knob while viewing the G FORCE
meter.
Readouts #2
SETUP MENU : Press the RPD knob to enter this
menu. The vehicle should be stopped while configuring
the setup menu selections.
BAROMETER : Displays ambient air pressure as
measured by the engine’s ambient pressure sensor.
SCREEN OFF : Turns the screen off.
Region B Readout Displays
Press the RPD knob to highlight Region B. The
information displayed can be changed by turning the
RPD knob either clockwise or counterclockwise.
Press the RPD knob again, to store the selection.
The selection will also be stored after a few seconds of
no activity. Available modes are:
Readouts #1
SHIFT LIGHTS/GEAR INDICATION : The shift lights
provide visual identification of engine speed for a
transmission gear. Shift light minimum and maximum
RPM settings can be viewed and configured in the
SETUP screen. The gear indication on manual
transmission vehicles is calculated by the engine
control module. The gear is only displayed when
enough torque is available to determine the selected
forward gear.
4-34
TIRE PRESSURES : Displays the last gage tire
pressures recorded from each of the wheel mounted tire
pressure sensors.
Readouts #3
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE : Displays ambient
temperature as measured by an outside air temperature
sensor.
BATTERY VOLTAGE : Displays the vehicle’s battery
voltage.
Readouts #4
COOLANT TEMPERATURE : Displays engine coolant
temperature as measured by a coolant temperature
sensor.
INLET AIR TEMPERATURE : Displays the
instantaneous temperature of the air at the inlet to the
induction system.
FUEL PRESSURE : Displays fuel pressure as
measured by a sensor on the output of the
high-pressure fuel pump.
INDICATORS
The indicators come on when the corresponding
function is actively working to stabilize or control the
vehicle. Each indicator light on the RPD display can be
turned on and off using the SETUP MENU. These
indicators work independently of the telltales on the
instrument panel cluster. Turning the indicator on the
RPD display on or off does not enable or disable the
functions on the vehicle.
This indicator comes on when Competitive Driving
Mode (A) has been set using the traction control switch.
This telltale comes on whenever conditions are right for
the Launch Mode (B) to activate.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑6 for
more information on Competitive Driving Mode and
Launch Control.
This indicator comes on whenever the vehicle
StabiliTrak® is actively working.
This indicator comes on whenever the vehicle Traction
Control system is actively working.
4-35
SETUP MENU
SETUP MENU Options
The SETUP MENU allows for the appearance of each
display screen to be customized. Turn the knob to scroll
through the screens to reach the SETUP MENU. Press
and release the knob to activate the SETUP MENU.
GAUGE APPEARANCE : While the gage is
highlighted, press the RPD knob. Then turn the knob to
choose the background color for a gage. Press the
knob again when gage color is chosen.
SHIFT LIGHT SETUP : This screen establishes a
RPM range where the shift light comes on for each
gear. Turn the RPD knob to highlight a shift light setting.
Press the knob to allow adjustment of the highlighted
setting. Turn the knob to adjust the value up or down,
then press the knob again to allow the selection of
another item. The number above each gear shows the
highest RPM the light comes on for a gear range.
The number below each gear indicates the lowest RPM
the light comes on for a gear range.
Selecting a SETUP MENU Option
1. Under SETUP MENU there are six menu options
to choose. Turn the RPD knob to highlight an
option.
2. Press and release the RPD knob to select the
highlighted menu option.
4-36
INDICATORS ON/OFF : Select on or off for each
indicator by turning the RPD knob to highlight ON or
OFF. Press and Release the RPD knob to apply the
choice. The actual Traction Control, StabiliTrak ®,
Competitive Mode, Launch Control functions and
instrument panel cluster telltales are not enabled or
disabled by these indicators.
SCREEN ORDER : While the screen order is
highlighted, press the knob to allow adjustment.
Turn the knob to reverse the displayed order of
Region A and Region B. Press the knob again once
the screen is chosen.
CONTRAST : While the contrast slider is highlighted,
press the knob to allow adjustment. Turn the knob to
adjust the contrast of the screen. Press the knob again
when the desired contrast is reached.
RESTORE DEFAULTS : Restores the original factory
screen defaults.
Applying a SETUP MENU Option
After each screen is customized, use this procedure to
apply the change and return to the SETUP MENU.
SET : Applies the changes to the display.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle's systems. The DIC is also used to display
driver personalization menu modes and warning/status
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC buttons are
located on the left side of
the steering wheel.
1. Turn until SET is highlighted.
2. Press and release while SET is highlighted to lock
in the setting and return to the previous screen.
RETURN /RET : Returns the display to the previous
screen without saving changes.
1. Turn to highlight the RETURN/RET option.
2. Press and release knob to return to the
previous menu.
INFO (Information) : Press this button to scroll
through the vehicle information mode displays.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle
information mode displays, select a personalization
menu mode setting, or acknowledge a warning
message.
4-37
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the
same time for one second, then release the buttons to
enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑46 for more information.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has
different modes which can be accessed by pressing the
DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in the
following.
Information Modes
INFO (Information) : Press this button to scroll
through the following vehicle information modes:
Outside Air Temperature and Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature and the odometer display. This mode
shows the temperature outside of the vehicle in either
degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C) and
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). The outside air
temperature appears on the left side of the DIC display
and the odometer appears on the right side of the
display.
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑46.
4-38
TRIP A or TRIP B
Press the information button until TRIP A or TRIP B
display. These modes show the current distance
traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometers can
be used at the same time.
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
reset button for a few seconds while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.
FUEL RANGE
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE
displays. This mode shows the remaining distance you
can drive without refueling in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank.
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW
displays.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)
AV (Average) SPEED
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVG
displays. This mode shows how many miles per gallon
(mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your
vehicle is getting based on current and past driving
conditions.
Press the information button until AV SPEED displays.
This mode shows the vehicle's average speed in miles
per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the
reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.
Average fuel economy is then calculated starting from
that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset, it is
continually updated each time you drive.
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST
displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy at
a particular moment and changes frequently as driving
conditions change. This mode shows the instantaneous
fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average fuel
economy, this screen cannot be reset.
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the
reset button while AV SPEED is displayed.
OIL LIFE
Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil's
remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system is
reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oil
on page 6‑16 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 7‑3.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”
under Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑21.
4-39
COOLANT
DIC Warnings and Messages
Press the information button until COOLANT displays.
This mode shows the temperature of the engine
coolant in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees
Celsius (°C).
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle's systems.
Tire Pressure
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS), the pressure for each tire
can be viewed in the DIC. The tire pressure is shown in
either pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
Press the information button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF
displays for the front tires. Press the information button
again until LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the
rear tires.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to
check the tire pressure appears in the display.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑63 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40 for more
information.
A message clears when the vehicle's condition is no
longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear it
from the display, press and hold any of the DIC buttons.
If the condition is still present, the warning message
comes back on the next time the vehicle is turned off
and back on. With most messages, a warning chime
sounds when the message displays. Your vehicle may
have other warning messages.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch.
BRAKE FLUID
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑23 for
more information. Have the brake system serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
4-40
CHANGE OIL SOON
COOLING MODE ON
This message displays when the life of the engine oil
has expired and it should be changed.
This message may display on some vehicles. Under
severe conditions, hot ambient temperatures, steep
grades, and towing, your vehicle may experience more
transmission shifting. This is temporary and normal
under these conditions. This does not require engine or
transmission service.
When this message is acknowledged and cleared from
the display, the engine oil life system must still be reset
separately. See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑21
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3 for more
information.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that it is
on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the message off.
COMPETITIVE MODE
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
when the Competitive Driving mode is selected.
The Traction Control System (TCS) will not be
operating while in the Competitive Driving mode and the
ESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster will be
on solid. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 5‑9, Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑6, and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 4‑25 for more
information.
CRUISE ENGAGED
This message displays when the cruise control system
is active. See Cruise Control on page 4‑6 for more
information.
DOOR AJAR
This message displays if one or more of the vehicle's
doors are open. Make sure that the door(s) are closed
completely.
ENGINE DISABLED
This message displays if the starting of the engine
is disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
4-41
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
This message displays to inform you that the vehicle
has reduced engine power to avoid damaging the
engine. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle's
ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but there is
no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven
at a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to your
dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is assisting
you with directional control of the vehicle. You may feel
or hear the system working and see this message
displayed in the DIC. Slippery road conditions may
exist when this message is displayed, so adjust your
driving accordingly. This message may stay on for a
few seconds after ESC stops assisting you with
directional control of the vehicle. This is normal when
the system is operating. See Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) on page 5‑6 and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/
Warning Light on page 4‑25 for more information.
4-42
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) NOT
READY
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message may display briefly after starting the
vehicle if the system's sensors are not yet calibrated.
The system is not functional until the message stops
displaying. Adjust your driving accordingly. When the
message is no longer displayed, the system is
functional. See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
page 5‑6 for more information.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when ESC is
turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑6 and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 4‑25 for
more information.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air
temperature is cold enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
LOW COOLANT
This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery in
the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4.
If your vehicle has a 2.0L engine, this message displays
when there is a low level of engine coolant. Have the
cooling system serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible. See Engine Coolant on page 6‑28 for
more information.
LAUNCH CONTROL
LOW FUEL
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
after the COMPETITIVE MODE message when the
vehicle is stopped. Launch control is a form of traction
control to control wheel spin while launching the vehicle
during closed track events and competitive driving
venues. The system will exit to COMPETITIVE MODE
after the vehicle is launched. See “COMPETITIVE
MODE” earlier in this section. See “Launch Control”
under Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑6
for more information.
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
on page 4‑31, Fuel on page 6‑6, and Filling the Tank
on page 6‑10 for more information.
LEARN COMPLETE
On vehicles without the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, this message displays when the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) has completed the tire learning
process. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 6‑65 for more information.
LOW TRACTION
If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) or Traction Control System (TCS), this message
displays and the ETS light or the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when the system is
actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions
may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your
driving accordingly. This message stays on for a few
seconds after the system stops limiting wheel spin.
See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 5‑12 or
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑9 and
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 4‑25 or Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 4‑25 for more information.
4-43
PARKING BRAKE
This message displays if the parking brake is left
engaged. See Parking Brake on page 3‑31 for more
information.
POWER STEERING
This message displays if a problem has been detected
with the electric power steering. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY
CONTROL)
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and a chime sounds if there has
been a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light
stays on solid as long as the detected problem remains
present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑6 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 4‑25 for more
information.
4-44
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try
resetting the system by turning the ignition off and then
back on. If this message still stays on or turns back on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the ESC inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible.
SERVICE TRACTION
If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) or Traction Control System (TCS), this message
displays and a chime sounds when the system is not
functioning properly. The ETS light or the ESC/TCS light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light
stays on solid as long as the detected problem remains
present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Enhanced
Traction System (ETS) on page 5‑12 or Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 5‑9 and Enhanced
Traction System (ETS) Indicator/Warning Light on
page 4‑25 or Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on
page 4‑25 for more information. Have the system
serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SVC (Service) BRAKE SYSTEM
TIRE LEARN ON
This message may display if you have a turbocharged
vehicle with Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and if the
hydraulic brake boost is not working or is working
improperly. Have the brake system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) and does not have the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system, this message
displays when the TPMS is re-learning the tire positions
on your vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned
after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑71,
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑65, and
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑63 for more
information.
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS), this message displays if a
part on the TPMS is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 4‑27. Several conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6‑66 for more information. If the warning comes
on and stays on, there may be a problem with the
TPMS. See your dealer/retailer.
TIRE LOW ADD AIR
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS), this message displays
when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle's tires
is low. The low tire pressure warning light will also come
on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 4‑27. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as
you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to
those shown on the Tire Loading Information label.
See Tires on page 6‑54, Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑25, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑63.
The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4‑38.
4-45
TRACTION OFF
If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) or Traction Control System (TCS), this message
displays and the ETS light or the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the
system is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 5‑12 or
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑9 and
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 4‑25 or Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 4‑25 for more information.
TRUNK AJAR
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
The default settings for the features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed
from their default state since that time.
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
Entering Personalization Menu
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at
the same time for one second, then release to
enter the personalization menu.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 3 km/h (2 mph),
only the UNITS menu will be accessible.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Press the reset button to scroll through the
available settings for each mode.
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
All of the features listed may not be available on your
vehicle. Only the features available will be displayed on
the DIC.
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
displayed.
4-46
Personalization Menu Modes
TIRE LEARN?
OIL LIFE RESET
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS), this mode is available on
vehicles without the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system. After rotating the tires or after replacing a tire
or sensor, the TPMS must re-learn the tire positions.
To re-learn the tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 6‑65. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑71 and DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑40 for more information.
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the
engine oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine
Oil Life System on page 6‑21. See “OIL LIFE” under
DIC Operation and Displays on page 4‑38 for more
information.
UNITS
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
ENGLISH (default in United States) : All information
will be displayed in English units.
METRIC (default in Canada) : All information will be
displayed in metric units.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows
remote start to be turned off or on. Remote start allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. When
REMOTE START appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
OFF : The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default) : The remote start feature will be enabled.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑6 for more
information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
4-47
LOCK HORN
UNLOCK HORN
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), this
feature, which allows the vehicle's horn to chirp every
time the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,
can be enabled or disabled. When LOCK HORN
appears on the display, press and hold the reset button
for at least one second to scroll through the available
settings:
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), this
feature, which allows the vehicle's horn to chirp on the
first press of the unlock button on the RKE transmitter,
can be enabled or disabled. When UNLOCK HORN
appears on the display, press and hold the reset button
for at least one second to scroll through the available
settings:
OFF (default) : The horn will not chirp on the first
press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
The horn will still chirp on the second press.
OFF (default) : The horn will not chirp when the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
ON : The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
4-48
ON : The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
LIGHT FLASH
DELAY LOCK
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), this
feature, which allows the vehicle's exterior hazard/turn
signal lighting to flash every time the lock, unlock,
or trunk release buttons on the RKE transmitter are
pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When LIGHT
FLASH appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY
LOCK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
OFF : The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will not
flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on
the RKE transmitter are pressed.
ON (default) : The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting
will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
ON (default) : The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the power lock
switch or the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter a second time.
OFF : The doors will lock immediately when pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on the RKE
transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4 for more information.
See Power Door Locks on page 3‑9, Delayed Locking
on page 3‑10, and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 3‑4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
4-49
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the
reset button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ALL (default) : All of the doors will automatically
unlock.
DRIVER : The driver's door will automatically unlock.
NONE : None of the doors will automatically unlock.
You will need to manually unlock the doors.
If you have a manual transmission vehicle, the door(s)
will automatically unlock when the ignition is turned off.
If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, you can
select when the automatic unlocking will occur. See
“UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transmission Only)”
following.
See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on
page 3‑10 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
4-50
UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic
Transmission Only)
This screen displays only if your vehicle has an
automatic transmission and DRIVER or ALL is selected
for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines
when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When
UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
KEY OFF : The door(s) will unlock when the key is
turned off.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default) : The door(s) will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on
page 3‑10 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
LANGUAGE
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), this
feature, which allows the vehicle's exterior perimeter
lighting to turn on each time the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.
When EXT LIGHTS appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on the
display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
OFF : The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
ENGLISH (default) : All messages will appear in
English.
FRENCH : All messages will appear in French.
SPANISH : All messages will appear in Spanish.
GERMAN : All messages will appear in German.
ON (default) : The exterior perimeter lighting will turn
on when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
To select a setting and exit out of the personalization
menu mode, press the information button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4 for more information.
Exiting Personalization Menu
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
The personalization menu will be exited when any of
the following conditions occur:
.
A ten second time period has elapsed.
.
The ignition is turned off.
.
The end of the personalization menu list is
reached.
4-51
Audio System(s)
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle's engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
{ WARNING:
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
.
Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
.
Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 5‑2.
4-52
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional
equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes may
not work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications on
page 6‑4.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 3‑23 for more information.
Setting the Clock
With Date Display
Without Date Display
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, and
Radio with Single CD (MP3) Player
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CD Player
To set the time:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
2. Press H until the hour begins flashing on the
display. Press H a second time and the minute
begins flashing on the display.
3. While either the hour or the minute numbers are
flashing, turn f to increase or decrease the time.
4. Press H again until the clock display stops flashing
to set the currently displayed time; otherwise, the
flashing stops after five seconds and the current
time displayed is automatically set.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press the H button until 12H or 24H is
displayed. Once 12H or 24H is displayed, turn the
f knob to the desired option to select the setting.
Press the H button again to apply the setting, or let the
screen time out.
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
3. Press the softkey located below any one of the
tabs that you want to change.
4. To increase the time or date do one of the
following:
.
Press the softkey located below the
selected tab.
.
Press
.
¨ SEEK, or \ FWD.
Turn f clockwise.
5. To decrease the time or date do one of the
following:
.
.
© SEEK or s REV.
Turn f counterclockwise.
Press
4-53
The date does not automatically display. To see the
date press H while the radio is on. The date with
display times out after a few seconds and goes back to
the normal radio and time display.
Radio(s)
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Press H and then the softkey located below the
forward arrow label. Once the time 12H and 24H,
and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)
and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.
2. Press the softkey located below the desired option.
3. Press H again to apply the selected default, or let
the screen time out.
Radio with CD (Base)
4-54
Radio Data System (RDS)
The radio may have RDS. The RDS feature is available
for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works when
the information is available. While the radio is tuned to
an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters
display. In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the radio features to
work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio
station.
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown,
Radio with CD (MP3) similar
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
4-55
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume) : Press to turn the system on and
off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) : Radios with
the Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) feature
automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate for
road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows
down, so that the volume level is consistent.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
Finding a Station
BAND : Press to choose between FM1, FM2, AM,
or XM™ (if equipped) on the Radio with CD (Base).
Press to choose between FM, AM, XM (if equipped) on
the Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port or the Radio
with CD (MP3).
f (Tune) : Turn to select radio stations.
© SEEK : Press to seek or scan stations with a
strong signal in the selected band.
.
To seek stations, press and release © SEEK to
go to the previous station and stay there.
.
To scan stations, press and hold © SEEK for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
goes to the next station. Press © SEEK again to
stop scanning.
.
To scan preset stations in the selected band, press
and hold © SEEK for four seconds until a double
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
stored preset. Press © SEEK again to stop
scanning preset stations.
2. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM tab on
the radio display.
4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
4-56
¨ SEEK : Press to seek or scan stations with a
strong signal in the selected band.
.
To seek stations, press and release ¨ SEEK to
go to the next station and stay there.
.
To scan stations, press and hold ¨ SEEK for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
goes to the next station. Press ¨ SEEK again to
stop scanning.
.
To scan preset stations in the selected band, press
and hold ¨ SEEK for four seconds until a double
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
stored preset. Press ¨ SEEK again to stop
scanning preset stations.
4 (Information) :
For vehicles with the Radio with CD
(Base), press to switch the display between the radio
station frequency and the time. While the ignition is off,
press 4 to display the time.
For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features,
press 4 to display additional text information related to
the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3, WMA
song. Song title information will be displayed on the top
line of the display while the artist information will be
displayed on the bottom line, it the information is
available during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback.
When information is not available, “No Info” displays.
Storing Radio Stations
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio
stations are stored as either favorites or presets.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Radio that have a FAV button store radio stations as
favorites.
Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favorites
while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite stations
using the softkeys, favorites button, and steering wheel
controls. See Defensive Driving on page 5‑2.
FAV (Favorites) : A maximum of 36 stations can be
stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below
the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio
favorites page button (FAV button). Press FAV to go
through up to six pages of favorites, each having six
favorite stations available per page. Each page of
favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or
XM stations. The current balance/fade and tone settings
are also stored with the favorite stations.
4-57
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station and set the
balance/fade and tone settings to the desired
levels.
2. Press FAV to display the page where to store the
station.
3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep
sounds.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be
stored as a favorite.
To setup the number of favorites pages:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the softkey located below the displayed
page numbers.
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time out, to return to
the original main radio screen showing the radio
station frequency tabs and to begin programming
favorites.
4-58
Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, CD, MP3, and
WMA features) : If additional information is available
for the current song being played, Auto Text will
automatically page/scroll the information every
three seconds above the FAV presets on the radio
display. By default, Auto Text is enabled.
To change the Auto Text setting:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey under AUTO TXT tab on the
radio display.
3. Press the softkey under the ON or OFF tab on the
radio display.
If 4 is pressed and the song title or artist information is
longer than what can be displayed, the extra information
will page every three seconds when Auto Text is
activated.
Storing a Radio Station as a Preset
Radios that have numbered pushbuttons store radio
stations as presets.
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with CD (MP3)
and USB Port or the Radio with CD (MP3):
1. Press
f until the tone control tabs display.
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
can be programmed on the six numbered buttons.
2. Press the softkey below the desired tab to be
adjusted.
To store preset stations:
3. To increase the level of the bass, midrange,
or treble:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons
for three seconds until a beep sounds.
3. Repeat the Steps 1 and 2 for each numbered
button.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble) : The
radio may display some or all tones such as BASS,
MID, and TREB.
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with
CD (Base):
Press f until the tone control labels display,
then turn f to change the setting.
.
.
¨ SEEK, or \ FWD.
Turn f clockwise.
Press
4. To decrease the level of the bass, midrange,
or treble:
.
.
© SEEK, or s REV.
Turn f counterclockwise.
Press
The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position by pressing the softkey
below the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more than
two seconds. The radio beeps once and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
4-59
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f
for more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
3. Turn f to adjust the highlighted setting. The
highlighted setting can also be adjusted by
pressing either SEEK arrow.
On some radios, \ FWD and s REV can also
be used to adjust the highlighted level.
If a station's frequency is weak, or has static, decrease
the treble.
EQ (Equalization) : Press this button to select preset
equalization settings.
To adjust balance or fade using
`:
` until the speaker control labels display.
Continue pressing ` until the desired speaker
To return to the manual mode, press EQ until Manual
displays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange,
or treble by pressing f .
1. Press
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
3. Turn f to adjust the setting. The setting
can also be adjusted by pressing either
SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV.
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, the
Balance/Fade can be adjusted using f or ` .
To adjust balance or fade using
1. Press
f:
f until the speaker control tabs display.
2. Press the softkey under the desired tab,
or continue pressing f to highlight the desired tab.
4-60
2.
control label displays.
The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fade
to the middle position by pressing the softkey below the
BAL or FADE tab for more than two seconds. The radio
beeps once and the level adjusts to the middle position.
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f
for more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)
CAT (Category) : The radio may have the CAT button
feature.
To select and find a desired category:
1. Press BAND until the XM frequency displays.
2. Press CAT to display the category tabs on the
radio display. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
3. Press either of the two softkeys below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
4. To go to the previous or to the next XM station
within the selected category, do one of the
following:
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab.
3. Turn
f to display the category to be removed.
4. Press the softkey below the Remove tab until the
category name along with the word Removed
displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove additional categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
softkey under the Add tab when a removed category
displays or by pressing the softkey below the Restore
All tab.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
f.
.
Turn
.
Press the softkeys below the right or left arrows
on the radio display.
.
Press
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK.
5. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display the favorites
again.
4-61
Radio Messages
Loading a CD
Calibration Error : Displays if the radio is no longer
calibrated properly for the vehicle. The vehicle must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD begins playing.
Loc or Locked : Displays when the THEFTLOCK®
system has activated. Take the vehicle to your dealer/
retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca
or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Radio Messages for XM Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 4‑72 for more
information.
4-62
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Ejecting a CD
Z EJECT : Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is
turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
f (Tune) :
playing.
Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
© SEEK : Press to go to the start of the current track,
if more than ten seconds have played. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving backward
through the tracks on the CD.
¨ SEEK :
Press to go to the next track. Press and
hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Reverse) : Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
\ FWD (Fast Forward) :
Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
BAND : Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary) : Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the track number displays when a CD is in
the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, No Aux Input Device Found
may display.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio may have the ability to play an MP3 CD-R or
CD-RW disc. See Using an MP3 on page 4‑66 for
more information.
RDM (Random) : Tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order.
To use random:
1. Press the softkey below RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays.
2. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.
4-63
CD Messages
Care of CDs
CHECK DISC : If an error message displays and/or the
CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
Store CD(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD
player scans the bottom of the disc. If the bottom of a
CD is damaged it may not play properly or at all. Do not
touch the bottom of a CD while handling it. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
.
The CD player is very hot. When the temperature
returns to normal, the CD should play.
.
The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
.
A problem may have occurred while burning
the CD.
.
The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
4-64
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a soft, lint free cloth
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to
the edge.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of the
CD if a description is needed.
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the
CD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD
player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” earlier in this
section.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system may have an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is
not an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into
the front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device
such as an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD
changer, etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input
jack for use as another audio source.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 5‑2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over the
vehicle speakers.
O (Power/Volume) : Turn to adjust the volume.
Additional volume adjustments may have to be made
from the portable device if the volume is too quiet or
not loud.
BAND : Press to listen to the radio while a portable
audio device is connected to the auxiliary input.
The portable audio device continues playing until it is
stopped or turned off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary) : Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is connected to the auxiliary
input. Press again and the system begins playing audio
from the connected portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, No Aux Input Device
may display.
4-65
Using the USB Port
Using an MP3
Radio's with a USB port can control a USB storage
device or an iPod® using the radio buttons and knobs.
See Using an MP3 on page 4‑66 for information about
how to connect and control a USB storage device or
an iPod.
Format
USB Support
The USB connector is located on the front of the radio
and uses the USB 2.0 standard.
USB Supported Devices
.
USB Flash Drives
.
Portable USB Hard Drives
.
Fifth generation or later iPod
.
iPod nano
.
iPod touch
.
iPod classic
Not all iPods and USB Drives are compatible with the
USB port.
Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from
Apple® for proper operation. iPod firmware can be
updated using the latest iTunes® application.
See www.apple.com/itunes.
For help with identifying your iPod, go to
www.apple.com/support.
4-66
Radios that have the capability of playing MP3's can
play .mp3 or .wma files that were recorded onto a CD-R
or CD-RW disc. Radios that have a USB port can
play .mp3 and .wma files that are stored on a USB
storage device as well as AAC files that are stored on
an iPod®.
Compressed Audio
The radio can play discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio and MP3 files. If both formats
are on the disc, the radio reads all MP3 files first, then
the uncompressed CD audio files.
CD-R or CD-RW Supported File and Folder
Structure
The radio supports:
.
Up to 50 folders.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
Up to 50 playlists.
.
Up to 255 files.
.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
.
Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension.
USB Supported File and Folder Structure
Order of Play
The radio supports:
Tracks are played in the following order:
.
Up to 700 folders.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
Up to 65,535 files.
.
Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.
.
Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.
.
AAC files stored on an iPod.
.
FAT16
.
FAT32
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored
in the root directory when the disc or storage device
does not contain folders. Files accessed from the root
directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT.
Empty Folder
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the
player advances to the next folder that contains files.
.
Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
.
Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. The display does not show parts of
words on the last page of text and the extension of the
filename is not displayed.
4-67
Preprogrammed Playlists
CDs that have preprogrammed playlists that were
created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however, there is
no playlist editing capability using the radio. These
playlists are treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are
stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio
with a USB port.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3
f (Tune) : Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currently
playing.
© SEEK : Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
¨ SEEK :
Press to go to the next track. Press and
hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
s REV (Reverse) : Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.
Release s REV to resume playing.
4-68
\ FWD (Fast Forward) :
Press and hold to
advance playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
S c (Previous Folder) : Press the softkey below
S c to go to the first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder) : Press the softkey below c T to
go to the first track in the next folder.
RDM (Random) : MP3 files can be listened to on a CD
in random, rather than sequential order. To use random,
press the softkey under the RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays to play songs from the current CD
in random order. Press the same softkey again to turn
off random play.
h (Music Navigator) : Press the softkey below
h to have the files played in order by artist or album.
The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and
album ID3 tag information. It can take several minutes
to scan the disc depending on the number of files on
the disc. The radio may begin playing while it is
scanning in the background.
When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files
in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on
the second line of the display. Once all songs by that
artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.
Connecting a USB Storage Device
or iPod®
To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey
located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the
next or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the
desired artist displays.
To connect a USB storage device, connect the device to
the USB port located on the front of the radio.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album:
1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab
from the sort screen.
3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to
the main music navigator screen.
The album name displays on the second line between
the arrows and songs from the current album begins to
play. Once all songs from that album have played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on
the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey below
the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USB
storage device.
To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable
that came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connector
and connect the other end to the USB port located on
the front of the radio. If the vehicle is on and the USB
connection works, “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo
may appear on the iPod and iPod appears on the
radio's display. The iPod music appears on the radio’s
display and begins playing.
The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle if
the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will not charge or draw
power from the vehicle's battery.
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported, it
can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input
Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
information.
4-69
Using the Radio to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
Using Softkeys to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod
using the radio buttons and knobs and display song
information on the radio’s display.
The five softkeys below the radio display are used to
control the functions listed below.
f (Tune) : Turn to select files.
© SEEK : Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
¨ SEEK :
Press to go to the next track. Press and
hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
s REV (Reverse) : Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward) :
Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
4 (Information) :
Press to display additional
information about the selected track.
4-70
To use the softkeys:
1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio
display to display the functions listed below,
or press the softkey below the function if it is
currently displayed.
2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function
on it to use that function.
j (Pause) :
Press the softkey below j to pause the
track. The tab appears raised when pause is being
used. Press the softkey below j again to resume
playback.
Back : Press the softkey below the back tab to go
back to the main display screen on an iPod, or the root
directory on a USB storage device.
c (Folder View) :
Press the softkey below c to
view the contents of the current folder on the USB drive.
To browse and select files:
1. Press the softkey below
2. Turn
c.
f to scroll through the list of folders.
3. Press f to select the desired folder. If there is
more then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
the desired folder is reached.
4. Turn f to scroll through the files in the selected
folder.
5. Press
f to select the desired file to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
.
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
h (Music Navigator :
Press the softkey below h
to view and select a file on an iPod, using the iPod's
menu system. Files are sorted by:
.
Playlists
.
Artists
.
Albums
.
Genres
.
Songs
.
Composers
To select files:
1. Press the softkey below
h.
f to scroll through the list of menus.
Press f to select the desired menu.
Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in the
2. Turn
3.
4.
selected menu.
5. Press
f to select the desired file to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
.
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
4-71
< (Shuffle Album) :
Press the softkey below >
to shuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod.
Repeat Functionality
To use Repeat:
Press the softkey below " or
Repeat All and Repeat Track.
' to select between
" (Repeat All) :
Press the softkey below " to repeat
all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All is
being used. This is the default mode when a USB
storage device or iPod is first connected.
' (Repeat Track) : Press the softkey below ' to
repeat one track. The tab appears raised when Repeat
Track is being used.
Shuffle Functionality
To use Shuffle:
Press the softkey below >, 2, < or = to
select between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle
Songs, Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.
> (Shuffle Off) :
Press the softkey below 2 to
turn shuffle off. This is the default mode when a USB
storage device or iPod is first connected.
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs) : Press the
softkey below = or < to shuffle all songs on the
USB storage device or iPod.
4-72
= (Shuffle Folder) :
Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage
device.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels) : These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer's request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating : The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal : The system is functioning correctly,
but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the
XM™ signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open
area, the signal should return.
Loading XM : The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air : This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth : This channel is blocked or cannot
be received with your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavail : This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
XM Theftlocked : The XM receiver in the vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having the
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
No Artist Info : No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Radio ID : If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
No Title Info : No song title information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
Unknown : If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with
your dealer/retailer.
No CAT Info : No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
Check Antenna : If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver or antenna could
have a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Information : No text or informational messages
are available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
Check XM Receivr : If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
CAT Not Found : There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Not Available : If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
4-73
Bluetooth®
Audio System
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make
and receive phone calls. The system can be used while
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m
(30 ft). Not all phones support all functions, and not all
phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
information on compatible phones.
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle's front audio system
speakers and overrides the audio system. Use the
audio system volume knob, during a call, to change the
volume level. The adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. To prevent missed calls, a
minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to
interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers and
name tags.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑84 for more
information.
Noise : Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
b g (Push To Talk) :
When to Speak : A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
c x (Phone On Hook) : Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
How to Speak : Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
4-74
Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
Pairing
Pairing a Phone
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Pairing Information:
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on this
process.
.
Up to five cell phones can be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system.
.
The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
.
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
.
Only one paired cell phone can be connected to
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
.
Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in
the list on the cellular phone and follow the
instructions on the cell phone to enter the four digit
PIN number that was provided in Step 3.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
4-75
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
4-76
.
If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
.
If another phone is not found, the original
phone remains connected.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
.
Store
.
Digit Store
.
Directory
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
.
If the system recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Storing” and repeats the
phone number.
.
If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats
the number followed by “Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. If the
number is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the number to be re-entered.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
.
If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
.
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
4-77
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
.
If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
.
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
.
If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
.
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
.
Delete
.
Delete all name tags
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
4-78
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete, <name
tag>? Please say yes or no”.
.
.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the
main menu.”
If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The
system responds with “No. OK, let's try again,
please say the name tag.”
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
.
Dial
.
Digit Dial
.
Call
.
Re-dial
Using the Dial Command
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar,
if present.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. Number please” followed by
a tone.
To use the delete all name tags command:
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
.
Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
.
Say “No” to cancel the function and return to
the main menu.
.
If the system recognizes the number, it
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number.
.
If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
re-entered.
4-79
Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
.
.
If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.
Using the Call Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
4-80
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
.
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
.
If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by
a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling, <name
tag>” and dials the number. If the name tag is
not correct, say “No”. The system will ask for
the name tag to be re-entered.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Using the Re-dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Receiving a Call
Three-Way Calling
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
.
.
b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
Press c x to ignore a call.
Press
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
.
Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
b g again to return to the original call.
.
Press
.
To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
.
Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
4. Once the call is connected, press
the callers together.
b g to link all
Ending a Call
Press c x to end a call.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
4-81
To Mute a call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes
after the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY position.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK,
accessing <phone name>”.
.
4-82
The cell phone's normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone's
operating instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.
.
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
.
If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The
system responds with “OK, Sending <name
tag>” and the dial tones are sent and the call
continues.
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
.
If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
.
If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and
phone pairing information. For information on how to
delete this information, see the above sections on
Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
4-83
Other Information
®
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑19 for
FCC information.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
e + / e − (Volume) : Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
w / x (Next / Previous) :
Press to change radio
stations, select tracks on a CD, or to select tracks and
navigate folders on an iPod® or USB device.
To change radio stations:
.
Press and release w or x to go to the next or
previous radio station stored as a preset.
.
Press and hold w or x to go to the next or
previous radio station in the selected band with a
strong signal.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
To select tracks on a CD:
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Press and release
previous track.
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
the vehicle's options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
4-84
w or x to go to the next or
To select tracks on an iPod or USB device:
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down the
list, then press and hold w to play the highlighted
track.
To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device:
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
2. Press and hold
folder list.
x to go back to the previous
3. Press and release
the list.
w or x to scroll up or down
w when the
.
To select a folder, press and hold
folder is highlighted.
.
To go back further in the folder list, press and
hold x .
c (End) :
Press to reject an incoming call, or end a
current call.
b g (Mute / Voice Recognition) : Press to silence
the vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the
sound on.
For vehicles with Bluetooth® or OnStar® systems press
and hold b g for longer than two seconds to interact
with those systems. See Bluetooth® on page 4‑74 and
the OnStar Owner's Guide for more information.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power
levels during the day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings
or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
4-85
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Fixed Mast Antenna
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills
can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or
standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages,
or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a
period of time.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged as long as it is securely
attached to the base. If the mast becomes slightly bent,
straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent,
replace it.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle's radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the
phone's battery, or simply having the phone on.
This interference causes an increased level of static
while listening to the radio. If static is received while
listening to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and
turn it off.
4-86
Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is
tightened to its base. If tightening is required,
tighten by hand until fully seated plus one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
or the rear of the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of
obstructions for clear radio reception.
Section 5
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Racing or Other Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Driving at Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Leaving on a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a Trailer (Automatic Transmission) . . . . .
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) . . . . . . . .
5-18
5-18
5-20
5-20
5-20
5-22
5-24
5-24
5-25
5-30
5-30
5-30
5-33
5-39
5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the
Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 2‑10.
{ WARNING:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
.
Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
5-2
Drunk Driving
{ WARNING:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems than the tires and
road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 5‑9, Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on
page 5‑12, and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
page 5‑6.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑23.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between the
vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
5-3
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic following distances
eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some
power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take
longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
If the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and
the 2.0L turbocharged engine, it also has a hydraulic
brake boost feature which supplements the power brake
system to maintain consistent brake performance under
conditions of low brake booster vacuum. Low brake
booster vacuum conditions can include initial start up
after the vehicle has been parked for several hours,
very frequent brake stops, or high altitude driving. When
hydraulic brake boost is active, minor brake pulsation or
movement might be felt but this is normal. If brake pedal
5-4
feel changes or the brake pedal feels hard to push, the
system might not be receiving the intended brake boost
and the SVC BRAKE SYSTEM DIC message may be
displayed.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
The vehicle might have the Antilock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that
helps prevent a braking skid.
If the vehicle has ABS,
this warning light on the
instrument panel comes
on briefly when the
vehicle is started.
When the engine is started, or when the vehicle begins
to drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on,
and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Braking in Emergencies
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
If the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC) with
Antilock Brake System (ABS), it allows the driver to
steer and brake at the same time. However, if the
vehicle does not have ESC with ABS, the first
reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold it
down — might be the wrong thing to do. The wheels can
stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannot respond
to the driver's steering. Momentum will carry it in
whatever direction it was headed when the wheels
stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the very
thing the driver was trying to avoid, or into traffic.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help the
driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to
get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. A slight brake pedal
pulsation might be felt or some noise noticed, but this is
normal.
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
If the vehicle does not have ABS, use a “squeeze”
braking technique. This gives maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. Do this by pushing on the
brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal. This
helps retain steering control. Without ABS, it is different.
See Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5‑4.
In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
5-5
Brake Assist
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
If this vehicle has ESC with ABS, it also has a Brake
Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping
or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the stability system
hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power
brake system under conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an
attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle.
The stability system hydraulic brake control module
increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle
until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal pulsations or
pedal movement during this time is normal and the
driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the
driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature will
automatically disengage when the brake pedal is
released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.
The vehicle may have an Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system which combines antilock brake, and
traction and stability control systems that help the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving
conditions.
5-6
When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the
system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
light comes on, and the ESC OFF and/or SERVICE
ESC message displays.
For more information, see Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 4‑37 and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 4‑25.
This light flashes on the
instrument panel cluster
when the ESC system is
on and activated.
ESC activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. ESC
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the
vehicle's brakes to help steer the vehicle in the intended
direction.
When the system activates, an ESC ACTIVE message
displays on the Driver Information Center. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40. This light also
flashes on the instrument panel cluster when the ESC
system is on and activated. Noise or vibration may be
felt in the brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to steer
the vehicle in the desired direction.
When the light is on solid and the message(s),
SERVICE ESC, ESC OFF, or both display, the system
will not assist the driver in maintaining directional
control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever the vehicle is started.
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road conditions, always leave the
system on. ESC can be turned off if needed.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system
begins to assist the driver maintain directional control of
the vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. The cruise control
can be re-engaged when road conditions allow. See
Cruise Control on page 4‑6.
The ESC/TCS button is
located on the instrument
panel.
The traction control system can be turned off or back on
by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both
traction control and ESC, press and hold the button
from five to ten seconds.
5-7
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION
OFF and ESC OFF messages appear, and the
ESC/TCS light comes on to warn the driver that both
traction control and ESC are disabled.
It is recommended that the system remain on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5‑24.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that
a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and
SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light
comes on to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and
requires service. If the problem does not clear after
restarting the vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for
service. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑40 for more information.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle's performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4 for more information.
5-8
Competitive Driving Mode
(SS Models Only)
The driver can select this optional handling mode by
pressing the ESC/TCS button on the console two times
quickly. COMPETITIVE MODE will be displayed in the
DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40.
Competitive Driving Mode allows the driver to have full
control of the front wheels while the ESC system helps
maintain directional control of the vehicle by selective
brake application. The ESC/TCS light will be on and the
traction control system will not be operating. Adjust your
driving accordingly. This electronic stability control
mode is recommended only for use during closed track
events and competitive driving venues.
When the ESC button is pressed again, or the vehicle is
restarted, the ESC and TCS will be turned back on.
Notice: When traction control is turned off,
or Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible
to lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the
front wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is
possible to cause damage to the transmission.
Do not attempt to shift when the front wheels do not
have traction. Damage caused by misuse of the
vehicle is not covered. See your warranty book for
additional information.
Launch Control (SS Models Only)
Traction Control System (TCS)
Launch Control is a form of traction control, to control
tire spin while launching the vehicle during closed track
events and competitive driving. The feature is activated
when the vehicle is at rest while in Competitive Mode.
At rest, if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor
with the clutch engaged, the RPM is limited to a
predetermined level. A smooth, quick release of the
clutch while keeping the accelerator pedal on the floor
will provide controlled wheel spin for consistent
acceleration. Complete shifts as described in Manual
Transmission Operation on page 3‑28.
The vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that the front wheels are spinning too much or
are beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power by closing the throttle and managing engine
spark to limit wheel spin.
LAUNCH CONTROL displays in the DIC after the
COMPETITIVE MODE message, when the vehicle is
stopped. The system will exit to COMPETITIVE MODE
after the vehicle is launched. See “Competitive Driving
Mode” earlier in this section. The normal Traction
Control System (TCS) will not be operating while in the
Competitive Driving mode and the TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑40 for more information.
This light flashes while
the traction control system
is limiting wheel spin.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working.
This is normal and does not mean there is a problem
with the vehicle.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 4‑25 for
more information.
5-9
If the vehicle is in cruise control while TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. The cruise control can be re-engaged when
road conditions allow. See Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 4‑4.
When this light is on and
either the SERVICE
TRACTION or TRACTION
OFF message is
displayed, the system will
not limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑40 for more information.
The Traction Control System comes on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started. It is recommended to
leave the system on for normal driving conditions,
but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the
vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, and you
want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it.
5-10
It may also be necessary to turn off the system when
driving in off-road conditions where high wheel spin is
required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow on page 5‑24.
To turn the system off or
on, press and release the
ESC/TCS button located
on the instrument panel.
The DIC displays the appropriate message as
described previously when the button is pressed.
Traction Control Operation
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine
power to the wheels (engine speed management) and
by applying brakes to each individual wheel
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when the vehicle is started, and it will activate and flash
the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION
message if it senses that either of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving.
For more information on the LOW TRACTION message,
see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑37.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle are allowed to
spin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and
Brake warning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/or
SERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed, the
differential could be damaged. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce
engine power and do not spin the wheel(s)
excessively while these lights and this message are
displayed.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction in
acceleration may be noticed or a noise or vibration may
be heard. This is normal.
If the vehicle is in cruise control while the system
activates, the ESC/TCS light flashes and the cruise
control automatically disengages. The cruise control
can be re-engaged when road conditions allow.
See Cruise Control on page 4‑6.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle's performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4 for more information.
Notice: When traction control is turned off,
or Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible
to lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the
drive wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is
possible to cause damage to the transmission.
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels do not
have traction. Damage caused by misuse of the
vehicle is not covered. See the warranty book for
additional information.
5-11
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
The vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power and may also upshift the
transmission to limit wheel spin.
If the vehicle has ETS, there is not an ESC/TCS button
on the instrument panel. To turn the system off, shift to
L (Low) or R (Reverse). There is more information about
how to turn the system off later in this section.
The ETS indicator/warning light flashes and LOW
TRACTION appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) when the traction control system is actively
limiting wheel spin. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working, but this is normal. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so
adjust your driving accordingly.
The ETS indicator/warning light may come on for the
following reasons:
.
The indicator/warning light flashes while the
traction control system is limiting wheel spin.
.
If the system is turned off by moving the shift lever
to L (Low), the indicator/warning light comes on
and stays on. To turn the system back on, move
the shift lever back to a position other than L (Low).
The indicator/warning light should go off.
.
The indicator/warning light will come on when the
parking brake is set with the engine running, and it
will stay on if the parking brake does not release
fully. If the transmission shift lever is in any position
other than L (Low) and the indicator/warning light
stays on after the parking brake is fully released,
there is a problem with the system.
.
If the traction control system is affected by an
engine related problem, the system will turn off and
the indicator/warning light will come on.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the ETS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. The cruise control can be re-engaged when
road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 4‑6.
5-12
If the ETS indicator/warning light comes on and stays
on for an extended period of time when the
transmission shift lever is in any position other than
L (Low), the vehicle may need service.
Check the DIC messaging to determine whether it is
because of the driver turning off the system, or that the
system may not be working properly and the vehicle
requires service. When this light is turned on, either the
SERVICE TRACTION or TRACTION OFF message will
be displayed.
When the system is turned off, the ETS indicator/
warning light will come on and stay on and the
TRACTION OFF message will be displayed when the
gear shift is in L (Low). The indicator/warning light and
message will not come on when the gear shift is in
R (Reverse). If the ETS is limiting wheel spin when the
transmission is shifted to L (Low) or R (Reverse) to turn
the system off, the indicator/warning light and
TRACTION OFF will come on in L (Low). But the
system will not turn off right away. It will wait until there
is no longer a current need to limit wheel spin. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40 for more
information on the messages associated with this light.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40 for
more information on the messages associated with
this light.
The system can be turned back on at any time by
shifting to D (Automatic Overdrive) or I (Intermediate).
The ETS indicator/warning light should go off.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, ETS should always be left on. But the
system can be turned off if needed.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle's performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4 for more information.
When this light is on solid, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
To turn the system off, shift to L (Low) or R (Reverse).
5-13
Limited-Slip Differential
Vehicles with a limited-slip differential can give more
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like
a standard axle most of the time, but when traction is
low, this feature allows the drive wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle. The limited slip design has
minimal impact to the steering feel, but boosts the
traction performance under all conditions.
Steering
Electric Power Steering
If the engine stalls while driving, the power steering
assist system will continue to operate until you are able
to stop the vehicle. If power steering assist is lost
because the electric power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be steered but it will take
more effort.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time, you
may notice a reduced amount of power steering assist.
The normal amount of power steering assist should
return shortly after a few normal steering movements.
5-14
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems and/or the POWER STEERING message
comes on, contact your dealer/retailer for service
repairs. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑40.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. These
problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time
because there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes — but, unless the vehicle
has antilock brakes, not enough to lock the wheels.
See Braking on page 5‑3. It is better to remove as
much speed as possible from a collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending on the
space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, it can be
turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
5-15
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
.
Look down the road, to the sides, and to
crossroads for situations that might affect a
successful pass. If in doubt, wait.
.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your
side of the lane.
.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
.
Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
.
When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches),
about one-eighth turn, until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
5-16
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by
not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle's
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
If the vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS) or
the Enhanced Traction System (ETS), remember: It
helps to avoid only the acceleration skid. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 5‑9 or Enhanced
Traction System (ETS) on page 5‑12. If the vehicle
does not have TCS or ETS, or if the system is off, then
an acceleration skid is best handled by easing your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
If the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), the
ESC might activate. See Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 5‑6.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
If the vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If the
vehicle does not have ABS, then in a braking skid,
where the wheels are no longer rolling, release enough
pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again.
This restores steering control. Push the brake pedal
down steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long
as the wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.
5-17
Racing or Other Competitive Driving
See your warranty book before using your vehicle for
racing or other competitive driving. After reviewing your
warranty book, please see the GM Performance Parts
website or catalog and contact the race sanctioning
bodies, for example Sports Car Club of America
(SCCA) or Grand American, for parts and equipment
required for racing or other competitive driving.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Night driving tips include:
.
Drive defensively.
.
Do not drink and drive.
.
Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
.
Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light
up so much road ahead.
5-18
.
Watch for animals.
.
When tired, pull off the road.
.
Do not wear sunglasses.
.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
.
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns
or curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep-standing or
flowing water.
{ WARNING:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal
until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
.
Allow extra following distance.
.
Pass with caution.
.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 6‑54.
.
Turn off cruise control.
5-19
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Things to check on your own include:
.
Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?
Windows clean — inside and outside?
.
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
.
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
.
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
.
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
.
Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe
place to park your vehicle and rest.
5-20
Other driving tips include:
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
.
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
.
Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in
these conditions include:
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
.
Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
.
Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{ WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
You would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always have
the engine running and the vehicle in gear when
going downhill.
{ WARNING:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down and they could
get so hot that they would not work well.
(Continued)
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that
let you stay in your own lane.
.
Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
.
Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
5-21
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
If the vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 5‑9 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on
page 5‑12, it improves the ability to accelerate on
slippery roads, but slow down and adjust your driving to
the road conditions. When driving through deep snow,
turn off the ETS, if equipped, to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5‑4
improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a
slippery roads, but whether the vehicle has ABS or not,
apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.
5-22
Without ABS, if the vehicle begins to slide, let up on the
brake pedal a little and apply steady pedal pressure to
get the most traction. On vehicles without ABS, braking
so hard that the wheels stop rolling can cause the
vehicle to slide — brake so the wheels always keep
rolling so you can still steer.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation.
Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑8. To get help and keep everyone in the
vehicle safe:
.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3.
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
{ WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑35.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.
Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
.
Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
.
Open a window about 5 cm (two inches) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
(Continued)
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to
keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle
and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as
little as possible to save fuel.
5-23
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5‑24.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
{ WARNING:
If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine
compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
55 km/h (35 mph) as shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 6‑78.
5-24
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction system.
Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transmission, between 1 (First) or
2 (Second) and R (Reverse), spinning the wheels as
little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after
a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on
page 5‑30.
Loading the Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification
label.
{ WARNING:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle's center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver door open, you will find
the label either attached above the door lock post
for a two door vehicle or below the door lock post
for a four door vehicle. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
5-25
The Tire and Loading Information label also
shows the tire size of the original equipment
tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more information on tires and
inflation see Tires on page 6‑54 and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑63 .
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle;
see “Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
5-26
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer (Automatic Transmission) on page 5‑33
or Towing a Trailer (Manual Transmission) on
page 5‑39 for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
Description
Example 2
Total
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
750 lbs (340 kg)
C
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
5-27
Refer to your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle's capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
5-28
A vehicle specific Certification label, found on the
rear edge of the driver door, tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR for your
vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
for either the front or rear axle.
If there is a heavy load, it should be spread out.
{ WARNING:
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
.
Put things in the cargo area of the
vehicle. In the cargo area, put them as far
forward as you can. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
.
Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
.
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
.
Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
{ WARNING:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
5-29
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer/
retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled
vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 8‑8.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
.
What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
.
What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long
they can tow.
.
Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
.
Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 5‑20.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
5-30
Dinghy Towing
Dinghy Towing From the Front
3. Shift an automatic transmission to N (Neutral) or a
manual transmission to Neutral.
4. Release the parking brake.
To prevent the battery from draining while the vehicle is
being towed, remove the following fuse from the floor
console fuse block: 8 (Ignition Switch, PASS-Key ® III+).
See Floor Console Fuse Block on page 6‑122 for more
information.
Remember to reinstall the fuse once the destination has
been reached.
Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceeded while
towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 105 km/h (65 mph) while towing the vehicle.
The vehicle may be dinghy towed from the front with all
four wheels on the ground following these steps:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY to
unlock the steering wheel.
5-31
Dinghy Towing From the Rear
Dolly Towing
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed
from the rear.
The vehicle cannot be dolly towed, but can be dinghy
towed. See “Dinghy Towing” earlier in this section.
5-32
Notice: Dolly towing your vehicle may cause
damage because of reduced ground clearance.
Always tow your vehicle using the dinghy towing
procedure listed in this section or put your vehicle
on a flatbed truck.
Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transmission)
{ WARNING:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating
extra heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment.
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later
in this section.
5-33
Pulling A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
.
.
There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure the rig will be legal, not only where you
live but also where you will be driving. A good
source for this information can be state or
provincial police.
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
1,000 miles (1 600 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, transmission or other parts could be
damaged.
.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
.
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle's parts.
.
Do not tow when the outside air temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).
.
Do not tow more than 1,000 miles (1 600 km)
per year.
5-34
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
.
The weight of the trailer
.
The weight of the trailer tongue
.
The total weight on the vehicle's tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment on
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 8‑6 for
more information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of
the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it,
and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there
are a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle
can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must
be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑25 for more information about the vehicle's
maximum load capacity.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that
will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will
help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the
rear axle.
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires
Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 5‑25. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit
for the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of the
trailer tongue.
If using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
5-35
Hitches
Trailer Brakes
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
Does the trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they
are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
.
.
The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
Will there be any holes in the body of the vehicle
after installing a trailer hitch? If there are, then be
sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is
removed. If the holes are not sealed, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from exhaust can get into
the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 3‑35.
Dirt and water can also enter the vehicle.
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the
road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Always
leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
5-36
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Get to know the rig before setting out for
the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling
and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And
always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is
by itself.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand
to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the
vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may think other drivers
are seeing the signal when they are not. It is important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.
5-37
Driving on Grades
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher than
normal engine and transmission temperatures may
result and damage the vehicle. Frequent stops are
very important to allow the engine and transmission
to cool.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
Pay attention to the engine coolant gage. If the indicator
is in the red area, turn off the air conditioning to reduce
engine load. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑33.
When towing under severe conditions such as hot
ambient temperatures or steep grades, the vehicle may
experience more transmission shifting. A COOLING
MODE ON message may also appear in the DIC.
This alerts the driver that the shifting mode is in
progress and is aiding engine cooling. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40 for more
information.
Parking on Hills
{ WARNING:
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on
a flat surface.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
5-38
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
.
Start the engine.
.
Shift into a gear.
.
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 6‑33.
Towing a Trailer
(Manual Transmission)
Do not tow a trailer if the vehicle is equipped with a
manual transmission.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3 for
more on this. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine
oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake
system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and
during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
5-39
2 NOTES
5-40
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Engine Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(2.0L Turbo Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.2L Engine) . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . .
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps (Coupe) . . . . .
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back-Up Lamps (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
6-27
6-27
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-34
6-36
6-37
6-40
6-41
6-45
6-48
6-48
6-48
6-50
6-50
6-51
6-52
6-53
6-54
6-1
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Different Size Tires and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage . . . . . .
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire (All Models Except SS) . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-54
6-55
6-56
6-57
6-61
6-64
6-65
6-67
6-71
6-73
6-73
6-75
6-76
6-77
6-77
6-79
6-79
6-81
6-88
6-89
6-90
6-95
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire (SS Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-100
6-109
6-112
6-113
6-113
6-114
6-115
6-115
6-116
6-116
6-116
6-117
6-117
6-118
6-118
6-119
6-119
6-119
6-120
6-120
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-120
6-120
6-121
6-121
6-121
6-121
6-121
Power Windows and Other
Power Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-121
6-122
6-122
6-124
6-128
6-3
Service
Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑73.
6-4
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many
fluids, and some component wear by-products contain
and/or emit these chemicals.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{ WARNING:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts, and
tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8‑16.
6-5
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑72.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Record on page 7‑15.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect
the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and
can affect fuel economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
6-6
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list of marketers
providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.
Gasoline Octane
If the vehicle has the 2.2L L4 engine (VIN Code 5), use
regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of
87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, an
audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving. If this occurs, use
a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If heavy knocking is heard when using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine needs
service.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle's engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 6‑120.
If the vehicle has the 2.0L L4 engine (VIN Code X), use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle's
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and a slight
audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard. If the octane is less than 87, you
might notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could
damage the engine. If heavy knocking is heard when
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
6-7
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines containing
MMT. See Additives on page 6‑8 for additional
information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, the vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could
turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog-check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑27. If this
occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
6-8
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not
be used in vehicles that were not designed for those
fuels.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,
or contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
6-9
Filling the Tank
{ WARNING:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released too
soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
6-10
{ WARNING:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6‑116.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4‑27.
The CHECK GAS CAP message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not properly
installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑40 for more information.
{ WARNING:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for
you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 4‑27.
6-11
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{ WARNING:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
.
Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling is
complete.
.
Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
.
Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
6-12
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ WARNING:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ WARNING:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following.
1. Pull the interior hood
release lever with this
symbol on it. It is
located under the
instrument panel on
the driver's side of the
vehicle.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood release lever to the left. It is
located under the front center of the hood toward
the driver's side of the vehicle.
3. After you have partially lifted the hood, a gas strut
will automatically take over to lift and hold the hood
in the fully open position.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Lower the hood until the lifting
force of the strut is reduced, then release the hood
to latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is
closed and repeat the process if necessary.
6-13
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.2L L4 engine, here is what you will see:
6-14
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Turbo Engine) on
page 6‑23 or Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(2.2L Engine) on page 6‑25.
E. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 6‑124.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑17.
G. Remote Negative (-) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 6‑41.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 6‑17.
H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System
on page 6‑28.
D. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 6‑37 and Hydraulic
Clutch on page 6‑27.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 6‑36.
F. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 6‑41.
6-15
When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 engine, this is what you will see:
6-16
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Turbo Engine) on
page 6‑23 or Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(2.2L Engine) on page 6‑25.
Engine Oil
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑17.
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
C. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
page 6‑28.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑17.
Checking Engine Oil
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for the
location of the engine oil dipstick.
E. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 6‑37 and Hydraulic
Clutch on page 6‑27.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
F. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 6‑124.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 6‑41.
H. Remote Negative (-) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 6‑41.
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System
on page 6‑28.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 6‑36.
6-17
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, add at least
one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil
crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications
on page 6‑128.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range, the
engine could be damaged.
6-18
2.2L Engine
2.0L L4 Engine
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
.
SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
For Vehicles With the 2.2L L4 Engine
Look for three things:
.
American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst
symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
.
GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
6-19
For Vehicles with the 2.0L L4 Engine Only
Look for three things:
Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M
Standard designation can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
.
SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
.
American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst
symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
.
GM4718M
This vehicle's engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M, such as Mobil 1® or
equivalent. Oils meeting this standard may be
identified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic
oils will meet this GM standard. Use only an oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M.
6-20
This vehicle's engine was filled at the factory with a
synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this vehicle.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
might not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
Cold Temperature Operation
For Vehicles With the 2.2L L4 Engine
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine Oil
to Use” for more information.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are
all that is needed for good performance and engine
protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System, a computer
system that indicates when to change the engine oil
and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and
engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on
driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system
to work properly, the system must be reset every time
the oil is changed.
6-21
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40. Change the
oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an
oil change is necessary for over a year. However, the
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a
year and at this time the system must be reset. Your
dealer/retailer has trained service people who will
perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
6-22
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a
CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on, reset
the system.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press the information and reset buttons on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) at the same time to
enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑46.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes until the
DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.
4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This will tell you
the system has been reset.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(2.0L Turbo Engine)
5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14
Engine Compartment Overview for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the reset procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3 Scheduled Maintenance
for more information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
6-23
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.
{ WARNING:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
3. Loosen the screws on the clamps holding the air
outlet duct in place. Do not remove the clamps.
4. Remove the air outlet duct.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily
get into the engine, which will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are
driving.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required. Never use compressed air to clean the filter.
6-24
5. To remove the filter cover, unlatch the clamps, then
pull up on the front and pull out.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(2.2L Engine)
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3 for more information.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.
6. Remove filter and inspect or replace.
Wipe all dust from inside of the housing and
inspect the air cleaner and air outlet duct for
cracks, cuts, and deterioration. The air outlet duct
must be replaced if damaged.
7. Reinstall the filter cover and latch the clamps.
8. Reattach the air outlet duct and tighten the screws
on the clamps that hold the duct in place.
9. Reconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.
6-25
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
{ WARNING:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily
get into the engine, which will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are
driving.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required. Never use compressed air to clean the filter.
6-26
To inspect or replace the filter, remove the screws that
hold the cover on and lift off the cover. Be sure to
reinstall the cover tightly.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to a dealer/
retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible.
It is not necessary to check the manual transmission
fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason
for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to a
dealer/retailer for service. Have it repaired as soon as
possible. You may also have the fluid level checked by
your dealer/retailer when the oil is changed. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11 for
the proper fluid to use.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the
Maintenance Schedule. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3. Be sure to use the transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. This system does not have its own
reservoir. It receives fluid from the brake master cylinder
reservoir.
See Brakes on page 6‑37 for more information.
6-27
Cooling System
The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
{ WARNING:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{ WARNING:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
2.2L L4 Engine shown, 2.0L L4 Engine similar
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
6-28
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
What to Use
{ WARNING:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. The vehicle's coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 6‑34
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
.
Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
6-29
.
Protects against rust and corrosion.
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
.
Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be
damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine
coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11 for more information.
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the driver's side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14
for more information on location.
6-30
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or
above the COLD FILL mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the
coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before this is done.
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.
If it is not, you may have a leak in the cooling
system.
How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank
{ WARNING:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
{ WARNING:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
6-31
{ WARNING:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
6-32
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about two or two and one-half
turns. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
This will allow any pressure still left to be vented
out the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the COLD FILL line, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the COLD FILL line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer/retailer, if necessary.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the COLD FILL line on the tank. Wait about
five minutes, then check to see if the level is below
the COLD FILL line. If the level is below the line,
add additional coolant to bring the level up to the
line. Repeat this procedure until the level remains
constant at the COLD FILL line for at least
five minutes.
6-33
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has an indicator to warn of engine
overheating.
You will find an engine coolant temperature warning
light on your vehicle's instrument panel. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 4‑26 for
more information.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑8.
If you do decide to lift the hood , make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the
engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire because of being
driven with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
6-34
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
{ WARNING:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is
no sign of steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
.
Stops after high-speed driving.
.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
.
Tows a trailer.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral) for
automatic transmission or NEUTRAL for manual
transmission , while stopped. If it is safe to do so,
pull off the road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and
let the engine idle.
6-35
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer's instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Notice:
.
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer's instructions for
adding water.
.
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water does not clean as well as washer fluid.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
.
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer system and
paint.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the tank
is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑14 for
reservoir location.
6-36
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master
cylinder and, on manual
transmission vehicles,
the clutch hydraulic
system use the same
reservoir filled with
DOT 3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for
the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
.
The brake fluid level goes down because of
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes back up.
.
A fluid leak in the brake and/or clutch hydraulic
system can also cause a low fluid level. Have the
brake and/or clutch hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later the brakes and/or
clutch will not work well.
Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid. Adding fluid does
not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the brake
linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new
brake linings are installed. Add or remove fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake/clutch
hydraulic system.
{ WARNING:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake and/or clutch hydraulic system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4‑23.
6-37
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed
container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11.
Notice:
.
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake or clutch hydraulic system parts. For
example, just a few drops of mineral-based
oil, such as engine oil, in the brake or clutch
hydraulic system can damage brake or
clutch hydraulic system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not let
someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
.
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6‑116.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
{ WARNING:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake or clutch
hydraulic system, the brakes or clutch might not
work well. This could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has front disc brakes and could have rear
drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come
and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving,
except when applying the brake pedal firmly.
6-38
{ WARNING:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake wear warning sound
is heard, have the vehicle serviced.
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do not have
wear indicators, but if a rear brake rubbing noise is
heard, have the rear brake linings inspected
immediately. Rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or
changing. When the front brake pads are replaced,
have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Brake Pedal Travel
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑128.
Brake Adjustment
Every moderate brake stop, the disc brakes adjust for
wear. If rarely making moderate or heavier brake stops,
the brakes might not adjust correctly. Very carefully
making a few moderate brake stops about every
1,000 miles (1 600 km) will adjust the brakes properly.
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes and the brake pedal
goes down farther than normal, the rear drum brakes
might need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up and
firmly applying the brakes a few times.
6-39
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change
in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake
parts are installed.
Battery
Refer to the replacement number on the original battery
label when a new battery is needed.
The battery is in the trunk. Access to the battery is not
necessary to jump start the vehicle. See Jump Starting
on page 6‑41.
{ DANGER:
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
{ WARNING:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on page 6‑41 for
tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
6-40
Jump Starting
If the vehicle's battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start the
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it
safely.
{ WARNING:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
.
They contain acid that can burn you.
.
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by
the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle's system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they are, it could cause a
ground connection you do not want. You would not
be able to start the vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. And it could save the radio!
6-41
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
Locate the remote
negative (−) ground
terminal, marked GND (−),
which is located behind
the engine coolant
surge tank.
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under
the hood. It is located in the trunk. You will not
need to access your battery for jump starting.
The vehicle has a remote positive (+) and a remote
negative (−) jump starting terminal.
Locate the remote
positive (+) terminal which
is located under a red
tethered cap on the
engine compartment fuse
block. Lift the cap to
access the terminal.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14
for more information on the location of the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminals on the
vehicle.
{ WARNING:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
6-42
{ WARNING:
{ WARNING:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you don't,
explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do
not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your
eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water
and get medical help immediately.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
6-43
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do not
touch each other or other metal.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle
with the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal marked GND (−).
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal (GND)
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
6-44
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to its original
position.
Headlamp Aiming
The optical headlamp aiming system has been preset at
the factory and should need no further adjustment
However, If the vehicle is damaged, the headlamp aim
may be affected and adjustment may be necessary.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be
re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
The vehicle should be:
.
Placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a
light colored wall.
.
On a perfectly level surface which is level all the
way to the wall.
.
Placed so it is at a right angle to the wall.
.
Clear of any snow, ice, or mud on it.
.
Fully assembled, with the tires properly inflated,
and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming
is being done.
.
Normally loaded with a full tank of fuel, with the
spare tire in the proper location, and one person or
160 lbs (75 kg) on the driver seat.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
6-45
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle's low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim on the headlamps:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6‑13.
3. At the wall, measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 2 and mark it.
4. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall the
width of the vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 3.
2. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot
on the low-beam headlamp.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
5. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard in front of the headlamp not
being adjusted. Do not place it directly on the
headlamp. This allows only the beam of light from
the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on the
flat surface.
6-46
8. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the
correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B)
shows the incorrect headlamp aim.
6. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for the opposite
headlamp.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm
socket wrench.
7. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
6-47
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 6‑54.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ WARNING:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
A. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp
B. Sidemarker
C. Headlamp
6-48
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6‑13.
5. Pull the headlamp assembly up at an angle and
towards the radiator to remove it.
6. Disconnect the bulb base from the wiring harness
by lifting the locking tab.
7. Disconnect the wiring harness from the bulb
socket.
8. Remove the retainer by turning it counterclockwise.
9. Turn the bulb socket for the headlamp, front turn
signal, or parking lamp counterclockwise. For the
sidemarker bulb, use a tool to assist in turning the
bulb socket.
10. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
11. Install a new bulb.
12. Reinstall the bulb assembly by reversing
Steps 1 through 9.
When reinstalling the headlamp assembly, first
make sure that the wiring harness is in its original
position. If not, the headlamp assembly will not fit
correctly.
2. Remove the two bolts from the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the two fasteners from the fascia.
Align the two tabs on the bottom of the assembly
that fit into two slots in the headlamp assembly
bracket.
Assistance may be needed for Steps 4 and 5.
4. Pull the front fascia back.
6-49
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
To replace a CHMSL bulb:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Press the tabs to release the bulb assembly.
5. Push the new bulb straight in until it clicks.
6. Align the tabs in the bulb assembly with the
assembly in the trunk lid. Push the bulb assembly
back into place until it snaps in. You may need to
use a tool to guide the tabs into the assembly.
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps
(Coupe)
To replace this bulb:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the trunk trim and pull back fastener.
3. Pull the bulb assembly down to access the bulbs.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out.
6-50
3. Disconnect the wiring harness by lifting up on the
tab to release and pull it straight out.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
straight out of the taillamp assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket.
6. Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket
until it clicks.
7. Push the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly
and turn it clockwise to lock it into place.
8. Push the wiring harness straight into the bulb
socket and push down on the tab.
9. Reinstall the trunk trim and fastener.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps (Sedan)
To replace one of these bulbs:
A. Sidemarker
1. Open the trunk.
B. Stoplamp/Turn Signal/Taillamp
2. Remove the trunk trim and pull back fastener.
C. Back-up
3. Remove the additional fastener.
4. Remove the outer two screws from the taillamp
assembly.
5. Lift up on the tab and pull the wiring harness
straight out.
6. Remove the taillamp assembly from the quarter
panel.
7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
straight out.
8. Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket.
9. Push the new bulb straight into the socket.
10. Push the new bulb into the taillamp assembly and
turn it clockwise to lock it into place.
6-51
11. Reinstall the taillamp assembly into the quarter
panel.
12. Push the wiring harness straight into the taillamp
assembly and push the tab down.
13. Reinstall the outer two screws into the taillamp
assembly.
14. Reinstall the trunk trim and the fasteners.
Back-Up Lamps (Coupe)
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
out of the lamp assembly.
To replace a back-up lamp bulb:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
2. Locate the back-up lamp bulb assembly in the
trunk lid.
6-52
On vehicles that have a back-up lamp cover, first
remove it by pressing the tab at the top.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket.
5. Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket
until it clicks.
6. Push the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and
turn it clockwise to lock it into place.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Push the bulb straight into the socket and turn
clockwise to reinstall.
6. Push and turn the license plate lamp away from
you through the opening.
7. Reinstall the two screws holding the license
plate lamp.
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the
license plate lamps.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp toward you
through the opening.
6-53
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Bulb Number
Back-Up Lamps
921
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
912
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
3157KX
Halogen Headlamps,
High/Low-Beam
9007 LL
License Plate Lamp and
Sidemarker
194
Stoplamp, Taillamp and
Turn Signal Lamps
3057KX
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7‑13.
Here is how to remove the wiper blades:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
6-54
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper
assembly toward the driver side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about the tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see the vehicle warranty booklet
for details. For additional information refer to the
tire manufacturer.
WARNING: (Continued)
should be checked when your vehicle's
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑64 .
.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire's tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle's tires have been damaged,
replace them.
{ WARNING:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
.
Overloading your vehicle's tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑25 .
.
Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
(Continued)
6-55
Low-Profile Performance Tire
Winter Tires
If the vehicle has 225/40R18 size tires, they are
classified as low-profile performance tires. These
tires are designed for very responsive driving on
wet or dry pavement. You may also notice more
road noise with low-profile performance tires and
that they tend to wear faster.
If the vehicle has 225/40R18 size tires, they are
classified as performance tires. These tires are
designed for very responsive driving on wet or dry
pavement. If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered
roads often, you may want to get winter tires for the
vehicle. All season tires provide good overall
performance on most surfaces but they may not offer
the traction you would like or the same level of
performance as winter tires on snow or ice covered
roads.
The 225/40R18 tire is a high performance tire
designed for dry traction and handling
performance which may result in reduced tread
life of 15,000 miles (24 140 km) or less depending
on individual driving behavior.
Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires, they
are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can
occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb. The vehicle
warranty does not cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure
and, when possible avoid contact with curbs,
potholes, and other road hazards.
6-56
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After
switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
New Tires on page 6‑73.
If you choose to use winter tires:
.
Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
.
Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load
range, and speed rating as the original equipment
tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y, and
ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with a
lower speed rating, never exceed the tire's maximum
speed capability.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size : The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
6-57
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification) : Original equipment tires
designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria
have a TPC specification code molded onto the
sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed
all federal safety guidelines. If your vehicle has
205/55R16 size tires, they meet the GM TPC
Spec rating, but the TPC Spec code has not been
molded onto the tire's sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation) : The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The
letters and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
6-58
(E) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) : Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based
on three performance factors: treadwear, traction
and temperature resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑76 .
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit :
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(B) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The
letters and numbers following the DOT
(Department of Transportation) code is the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit :
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only : The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on page 6‑112 andIf a Tire
Goes Flat on page 6‑79 .
(E) Tire Inflation : The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6‑64 .
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary use only.
6-59
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification) : Original equipment tires
designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria
have a TPC specification code molded onto the
sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed
all federal safety guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(B) Tire Width : The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio : A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire's sidewall is 60 percent as high as it
is wide.
(D) Construction Code : A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted-bias ply
construction.
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in the tire size means
a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. A tire
size without the letter P as the first character is
certified to European standards.
6-60
(F) Service Description : These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure : The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight : This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio : The relationship of a tire's height
to its width.
Belt : A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead : The tire bead contains steel wires
wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure : The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6‑64 .
Curb Weight : The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings : A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and
date of production.
GVWR : Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑25 .
GAWR FRT : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑25 .
GAWR RR : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑25 .
6-61
Intended Outboard Sidewall : The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unit for air
pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : A tire used on light
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index : An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure : The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating : The load rating for a
tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight : The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
6-62
Normal Occupant Weight : The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑25 .
Occupant Distribution : Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall : The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure : Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑64 and Loading
the Vehicle on page 5‑25 .
Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim : A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall : The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating : An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction : The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread : The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators : Narrow bands,
sometimes called wear bars, that show across the
tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of
tread remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 6‑73 .
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards) : A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire's
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑76 .
Vehicle Capacity Weight : The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑25 .
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire : Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard : A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle's capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑25 .
6-63
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
.
Too much flexing
.
Too much heat
.
Tire overloading
.
Premature or irregular wear
.
Poor handling
.
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
.
Unusual wear
.
Poor handling
.
Rough ride
.
Needless damage from road hazards
6-64
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle's original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑25 . How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one. It should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
For additional information regarding the compact
spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 6‑112 .
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
The vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). This system uses radio and sensor technology
to check tire pressure levels. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in your vehicle's tires and
transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in
the vehicle.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure
is low, add air until you reach the recommended
amount.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
6-65
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
6-66
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑67 for
additional information.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑19 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. If your vehicle has
this feature, TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel
assembly, if the vehicle has one. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle's tires and
transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located
in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS turns on the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and
the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be
viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4‑38 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑40.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator
that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of
your vehicle's original equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for your vehicle's tires when they are
cold. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑25, for an
example of the Tire and Loading Information label and
its location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑64.
Your vehicle's TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑71 and Tires on page 6‑55.
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using an
incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle
warranty. Always use the GM approved tire sealant
available through your dealer/retailer.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM approved
liquid tire sealant. Using non-approved tire sealants
could damage the TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 6‑81 for information regarding
the inflator kit materials and instructions.
6-67
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that
can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to
come on are:
.
.
.
6-68
One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire, if the vehicle has one. The spare tire
does not have a TPMS sensor. The TPMS
malfunction light and DIC message should go off
once you re-install the road tire containing the
TPMS sensor.
The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle's tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the
TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching
Process” later in this section.
One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
.
Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle's original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for
your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 6‑73.
.
Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service
if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes
on and stays on.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle's tires, the identification codes
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel location.
The sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel locations, in
the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side
front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/
wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire's air
pressure. When increasing the tire's pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire's sidewall. To decrease the tire's air-pressure use
the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air
pressure gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match
any tire and wheel position, the matching process stops
and you need to start over.
TPMS Matching Process for Vehicles
with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter's lock and unlock buttons, at the same
time, for about five seconds to start the TPMS
learn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating the
TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode.
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side
front turn signal also comes on to indicate that
corner's sensor is ready to be learned.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire's valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure for about
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm the
sensor identification code has been matched to the
tire/wheel position.
6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
6-69
9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound to
indicate the tire learning process is done. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS
learn mode, or if communication with the receiver
stops, or if the time limit has expired, turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF and start over
beginning with Step 2.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
TPMS Matching Process for Vehicles
without Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Using the Driver Information Center (DIC), press
the INFO and Set/Reset buttons at the same time
for about one second. Then press and release the
INFO button until the TIRE LEARN? message
displays.
6-70
4. Press and hold the Set/Reset DIC button for
approximately three seconds to start the TPMS
learn mode. The horn sounds twice to indicate the
TPMS receiver is ready and the TIRE LEARN ON
message displays. The driver side front turn signal
also comes on to indicate that corner sensor is
ready to be learned.
5. Start with the driver side front tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the tire's valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure for about
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm the
sensor identification code has been matched to the
tire/wheel position.
7. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat
the procedure in Step 6.
8. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat
the procedure in Step 6.
9. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 6.
10. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound to
indicate the tire learning process is done. The
LEARN COMPLETE message displays if all four
tire positions are learned. Turn the ignition switch
to LOCK/OFF.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS
learn mode, or if communication with the receiver
stops, or if the time limit has expired, the TIRE
LEARN? message displays on the DIC. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF and start over
beginning with Step 2.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect the
vehicle's tires, including the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, for signs of wear or damage.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6‑73
for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3 .
If this vehicle has P225/40R18 size tires, they
should be rotated every 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that the vehicle continues to perform most
like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6‑73 and
Wheel Replacement on page 6‑77 .
6-71
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑128 .
{ WARNING:
When rotating the vehicle's tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑64 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑25 .
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), reset the TPMS sensors after
rotating the tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 6‑67 .
6-72
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑89 .
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how
fast this aging takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically
wear out before they degrade due to age. If you are
unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
Buying New Tires
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
.
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire's rubber.
.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you
need replacement tires, GM strongly recommends
that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating.
This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires
that are designed to give the same performance
and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the
original tires.
6-73
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire's sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud
and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 6‑57 for additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle performing most like it
did when the tires were new. Replacing less than
a full set of tires can affect the braking and
handling performance of your vehicle. See Tire
Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑71 for
information on proper tire rotation.
{ WARNING:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure
to use the correct size, brand, and type of
tires on all wheels. It is all right to drive with
your compact spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on your vehicle. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 6‑112 .
{ WARNING:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the
vehicle.
6-74
If you must replace your vehicle's tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)
as your vehicle's original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low-pressure warning that is higher or lower
than the proper warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 6‑65 .
Your vehicle's original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label. See
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑25 , for more
information about the Tire and Loading
Information Label and its location on your vehicle.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover . Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as, antilock brakes, traction
control, and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
{ WARNING:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not recommended
for those wheels are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your vehicle, and have
them properly installed by a GM certified
technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 6‑73 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 6‑4 for additional
information.
6-75
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
6-76
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law. It should
be noted that the temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be
necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice
unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or
the other, the alignment might need to be checked.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper
diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
6-77
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑89 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{ WARNING:
{ WARNING:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far
it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use
a new GM original equipment wheel.
6-78
Tire Chains
{ WARNING:
If your vehicle has P195/65R15, P205/55R16,
P205/50R17, or 225/40R18 size tires, do not use
tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there is not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination, and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer's
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not
spin your vehicle's wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P195/65R15, P205/55R16, P205/50R17 or 225/40R18
size tires, use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class S-type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain manufacturer's
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast
or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage
your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain the tires properly. See Tires
on page 6‑55. If air goes out of a tire, It is much more
likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a
blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and
what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
6-79
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under
control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go.
It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place and stopping.
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 4‑3.
2. Park the vehicle. Set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
6-80
{ WARNING:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a
jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a
jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for
changing a flat tire.
This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a
tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jack and
spare tire, see Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑89.
To use the tire sealant and compressor kit, see Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 6‑81.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
{ WARNING:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or
smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area
that has no fresh air ventilation. For more
information, see Engine Exhaust on page 3‑35.
{ WARNING:
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger compartment of
the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could strike someone.
Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit,
there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not be a place to
store a tire.
{ WARNING:
The tire sealant and compressor can be used to
temporarily seal punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate an
under inflated tire.
Over-inflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not exceed the
recommended pressure.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire sealant and
compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 8‑8.
6-81
Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions.
The kit includes:
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
label adhered to the sealant canister.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before
its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After
usage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
A. Air Compressor
E. Pressure Gage
B. Tire Sealant Canister
F. Air Only Hose (Black)
C. Power Plug
G. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
D. On/Off Button
6-82
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 6‑79. Do not remove any objects that have
penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from
its storage location. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit Storage on page 6‑88.
Make sure the on/off button (D) is in the off (O)
position.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and the power
plug (C).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
When using the tire sealant and compressor kit
during cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated
environment for 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the
tire faster.
6-83
6. Plug the power plug (C) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 4‑12.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do
not use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running
while using the air compressor.
8. Press the on/off (D) button to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject sealant and air into
the tire.
The pressure gage (E) will initially show a high
pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant
into the tire. Once the sealant is completely
dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly
drop and start to rise again as the tire inflates with
air only.
9. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure gage (E).
The recommended inflation pressure can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑64.
The pressure gage (E) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate
pressure reading. The compressor may be turned
on/off until the correct pressure is reached.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle
should not be driven farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit
cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and unscrew the
inflating hose from the tire valve. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 8‑8.
10. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
The tire is not sealed and will continue to
leak air until the vehicle is driven and the
sealant is distributed in the tire, therefore,
Steps 11 through 17 must be done immediately
after Step 10.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
6-84
11. Unplug the power plug (C) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
12. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) counterclockwise to
remove it from the tire valve stem.
13. Replace the tire valve stem cap.
14. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the power
plug (C) back in their original location.
15. If the flat tire was able
to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove the
maximum speed label
from the sealant
canister (B) and place
it in a highly visible
location.
The label is a reminder not to exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the damaged tire is repaired or
replaced.
16. Return the equipment to its original storage
location in the vehicle.
17. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
18. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “Using the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to
Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured).”
If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi
(68 kPa) below the recommended inflation
pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal
the tire. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑8.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
19. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire or
vehicle.
20. Dispose of the used sealant canister (B) and
sealant/air hose (F) assembly at a local dealer/
retailer or in accordance with local state codes and
practices.
21. Replace it with a new canister available from your
dealer/retailer.
22. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire
sealant and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer/retailer within a 100 miles
(161 km) of driving to have the tire repaired or
replaced.
6-85
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
2. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B) by pulling up on the lever.
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
4. Remove the power plug (C) from the air
compressor (A).
3. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B).
5. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
6. Remove the tire valve stem cap by turning it
counterclockwise.
7. Attach the air only hose (F) onto the tire valve stem
and press the lever down to secure it.
8. Plug the power plug (C) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 4‑12.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do
not use the cigarette lighter.
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 6‑79.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from
its storage location. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit Storage on page 6‑88.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
6-86
9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running
while using the air compressor.
10. Press the on/off (D) button to turn the
compressor on.
The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.
11. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure gage (E). The
recommended inflation pressure can be found on
the Tire and Loading Information label. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑64.
Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
The pressure gage (E) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate
reading. The compressor may be turned on/off until
the correct pressure is reached.
12. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
13. Unplug the power plug (C) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
14. Disconnect the air only hose (F) from the tire valve
stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
15. Replace the air only hose (F) and the power
plug (C) back in its original location.
16. Place the equipment in the original storage location
in the vehicle.
1. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B) by pulling up on the lever.
2. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B).
3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) from the
compressor (A).
6-87
To install a new sealant canister:
1. Align the sealant/air hose (F) with the slot in the air
compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister (B) down and turn it
clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (F) around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original
location.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose (F) onto the
sealant canister inlet and push the lever down.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Storage
The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in the
trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
4. Turn the sealant canister (B) so the inflator filling
hose is aligned with the slot in the compressor.
5. Lift the sealant canister (B) from the compressor
and replace with a new sealant canister. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
6-88
2. Lift the trunk liner.
{ WARNING:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual transmission to
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
3. Remove the retainer that holds the tire sealant and
compressor kit.
4. Remove the kit from the foam container.
To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse
the steps.
Changing a Flat Tire
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3.
6-89
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks (A).
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk.
Base Models
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
6-90
2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tire and
tools.
A. Cover
B. Retainer
C. Spare Tire
D. Wing Nut
E. Jack and Wheel Wrench
F. Bolt
3. Remove the retainer (B) that holds down the spare
tire. See Compact Spare Tire on page 6‑112 for
more information.
4. Remove the spare tire (C) by gently pulling it up
and out of the trunk.
5. Remove the wing nut (D) that holds the jack and
remove the jack and wheel wrench (E).
6-91
Uplevel Models
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tire and
tools.
6-92
A. Retainer
B. Jack and Wheel Wrench
C. Spare Tire
D. Foam Support
E. Bolt
3. Remove the retainer (A) that holds down the jack,
wheel wrench (B) and spare tire (C).
4. Remove the spare tire by gently pulling it up and
out of the trunk.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and
wheel wrench (B).
6-93
You will need to turn the plastic wheel nut
counterclockwise to loosen the wheel wrench from
the jack.
6-94
Press the button and then pull on the end of the wheel
wrench to extend the handle.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
(All Models Except SS)
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑89.
Once the plastic wheel nut caps have been
loosened with the wheel wrench, you can finish
loosening them with your fingers. The plastic nut
caps do not come off.
3. If necessary, use the flat end of the wheel wrench
to pry along the edge of the wheel cover until it
comes off.
Store the wheel cover in the trunk until the flat tire
is repaired or replaced.
4. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
2. If your vehicle has plastic wheel covers, use the
wheel wrench to loosen the plastic wheel nut caps.
6-95
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
6. Raise the jack head until it fits firmly in the
vehicle's frame, where the notch is located,
nearest the flat tire.
7. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tire.
{ WARNING:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
5. Position the jack lift head at the jack location
nearest the flat tire. The front location is about
8 inches (20 cm) behind the front wheel opening.
The rear location is about 4 inches (10 cm) in front
of the rear wheel opening.
6-96
{ WARNING:
9. Remove all of the
wheel nuts and flat tire.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
6-97
11. Place the compact spare tire on the
wheel-mounting surface.
{ WARNING:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6‑89.
{ WARNING:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
12. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
6-98
{ WARNING:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6‑128 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑128 for the wheel nut torque
specification.
4-Wheel Nuts
5-Wheel Nuts
Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle's
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be
damaged.
6-99
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire (SS Model)
The SS Model has larger performance brakes than the
base model. The compact spare tire will not clear the
front brakes.
Do not use the compact spare tire in the event of a front
flat tire.
You must use the rear tire to replace the front flat tire.
To change the rear road tire:
Rear Tire Changing Procedure
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑89 for more
information.
2. If your vehicle has plastic wheel covers, use the
wheel wrench to loosen the plastic wheel nut caps.
Once the plastic wheel nut caps have been
loosened with the wheel wrench, you can finish
loosening them with your fingers. The plastic nut
caps do not come off.
3. If necessary, use the flat end of the wheel wrench
to pry along the edge of the rear wheel cover until
it comes off.
Store the wheel cover in the trunk until the flat tire
is repaired or replaced.
6-100
4. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the rear wheel
nuts. Do not remove them yet.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
6. Raise the jack head until it fits firmly in the
vehicle's frame, where the notch is located,
nearest the flat tire.
7. Put the compact spare tire near the rear tire.
{ WARNING:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
5. Position the jack lift head at the rear jack location
nearest the rear tire. The rear location is about
4 inches (10 cm) in front of the rear wheel opening.
6-101
9. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
{ WARNING:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
{ WARNING:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
(Continued)
6-102
WARNING: (Continued)
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6‑89.
10. Place the compact spare tire on the
wheel-mounting surface.
{ WARNING:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
11. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
6-103
{ WARNING:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6‑128 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑128 for the wheel nut torque
specification.
6-104
13. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
5-Wheel Nuts
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle's
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be
damaged.
To change the front flat tire:
Front Flat Tire Changing Procedure:
1. Perform a rear tire change by removing the rear
tire and installing the compact spare tire in the rear
wheel location. The rear road tire will be used to
replace the front flat tire. See Rear Tire Changing
Procedure in this section.
2. Do a safety check before proceeding. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑89.
Once the plastic wheel nut caps have been
loosened with the wheel wrench, you can finish
loosening them with your fingers. The plastic nut
caps do not come off.
4. If necessary, use the flat end of the wheel wrench
to pry along the edge of the wheel cover until it
comes off.
Store the wheel cover in the trunk until the flat tire
is repaired or replaced.
5. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts
on the flat tire. Do not remove them yet.
3. If your vehicle has plastic wheel covers, use the
wheel wrench to loosen the plastic wheel nut caps.
6-105
{ WARNING:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ WARNING:
6. Position the jack lift head at the jack location
nearest the flat tire. The front location is about
8 inches (20 cm) behind the front wheel opening.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
7. Raise the jack head until it fits firmly in the
vehicle's frame, where the notch is located,
nearest the flat tire.
8. Put the tire near the flat tire.
6-106
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
9. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
10. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
{ WARNING:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6‑89.
11. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
12. Place the tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
6-107
{ WARNING:
{ WARNING:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6‑128 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
13. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
14. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑128 for the wheel nut torque
specification.
6-108
15. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{ WARNING:
5-Wheel Nuts
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle's
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be
damaged.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
6-109
A. Cover
B. Retainer
C. Jack and Wheel Wrench
D. Stow Bolt Extension Rod
E. Flat Tire
F. Bolt
Base Model
6-110
A. Cover
B. Retainer
C. Jack and Wheel Wrench
D. Stow Bolt Extension Rod
E. Flat Tire
F. Foam Support
G. Bolt
To store a flat tire and tools:
1. Remove the stow bolt extension rod and sleeve
from the jack.
2. Screw the stow bolt extension rod and the sleeve
into the existing spare tire hold-down bolt.
3. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, first remove
the center cap with your hand or the wheel wrench.
4. Place the flat tire face down into the spare tire tub.
5. Re-attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
6. Place the jack into the center of the flat tire, being
careful not to scratch the inside of the wheel.
7. Remove the plastic sleeve from the stow bolt
extension rod. Secure the jack and road wheel
using the larger plastic retainer.
Uplevel Model
8. If used in the vehicle, place the smaller jack
retainer nut in a safe place until you are ready to
store the compact spare tire in the trunk again.
6-111
To store the compact spare tire and tools, follow the
previous procedure without using the stow bolt
extension rod and see Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools on page 6‑90 and follow the removal procedure,
in reverse, for the proper jack storage instructions for
this vehicle.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare with a full-size tire as soon
as possible.
Compact Spare Tire
{ WARNING:
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at
a time could result in loss of braking and handling.
This could lead to a crash and you or others could
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at
a time.
This vehicle may have a compact spare tire. Although
the compact spare tire was fully inflated when the
vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the
inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi
(420 kPa).
6-112
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, if the
vehicle has one, stop as soon as possible and make
sure the spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact
spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have the full-size tire
repaired or replaced at your convenience. Of course, it
is best to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon
as possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in
good shape in case it is needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not
take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the tire, wheel and other
parts of the vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare
tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
the compact spare.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle's interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
the upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils
should be removed as quickly as possible. The
vehicle's interior may experience extremes of heat that
could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle's interior.
When cleaning the vehicle's interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle's breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning the vehicle's
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening the
vehicle's doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
6-113
Products that remove odors from the vehicle's
upholstery and clean the vehicle's glass can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
.
A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
.
A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
.
Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
.
Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.
.
Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
.
Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle's interior.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any
soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club
soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the
soil as possible using one of the following techniques:
.
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper
towel until no more can be removed.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that
was used with plain water.
6-114
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat
to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use
spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of the leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
the vehicle's interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle's interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
6-115
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle's finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
6-116
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on
the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not
be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers'
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Finish Care
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are
marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6‑116.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal parts.
6-117
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.
Extreme dusty conditions
.
Sand and salt
.
Heat and sun
.
Snow and ice, without proper removal
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
The vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
6-118
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle's chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because they could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive a
vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on
the vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer's/retailer's body and paint shop.
6-119
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing
system can do this.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
6-120
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑128 for
the vehicle's engine code.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label, in the trunk, on the driver side near the spare
tire cover, has the following information:
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
.
Model designation
.
Paint information
.
Production options and special equipment
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑72 and
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑73.
Headlamp Wiring
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses. Should the
headlamps fail to function, have the headlamp system
checked right away.
Electrical System
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle
unless you check with your dealer/retailer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle
and the damage would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
6-121
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Floor Console Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the
same amperage. Just pick some feature of the vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse if it is the
correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in the vehicle: the floor
console fuse block and the engine compartment fuse
block.
There is one additional fuse located in the back of the
vehicle near the battery.
6-122
The floor console fuse block is located on the
passenger side of the floor console behind the forward
panel. The panel has three clips. Pull the panel to
disconnect the three clips, and access the fuses. Use
the fuse puller to remove fuses.
Fuses
Usage
1
Fuse Puller
2
Empty
3
Empty
4
Empty
5
Empty
6
Amplifier
7
Cluster
8
Ignition Switch, PASS-Key® III+
9
Stoplamp
10
Heating, Ventilation, Air
Conditioning, PASS-Key® III+
11
Empty
12
Spare
13
Airbag
14
Spare
15
Windshield Wiper
16
Climate Control System, Ignition
17
Window Retained Accessory Power
18
Empty
6-123
Fuses
Usage
19
Electric Power Steering, Steering
Wheel Control
20
Sunroof
21
Spare
22
Empty
23
Audio System
24
XM Radio™, OnStar™
25
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
26
Door Locks
27
Interior Lights
28
Steering Wheel Control Illumination
29
Power Windows
Relays
6-124
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the vehicle. Lift off the cover to check the
fuses. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 6‑14 for more information on location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Usage
30
Climate Control System
31
Empty
32
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Fuses
Usage
SPARES
Spares
ABS
Antilock Brake System
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
REAR DEFOG
Rear Defogger
COOL FAN2
Engine Cooling Fan High Speed
CRNK
Starter
COOL FAN 1
Engine Cooling Fan Low Speed
BCM3
Body Control Module 3
BCM2
Body Control Module 2
FOG LAMP
Fog Lamps
HORN
Horn
RT HI BEAM
Passenger Side High Beam Lamp
LT HI BEAM
Driver Side High Beam Lamp
RT LO BEAM
Passenger Side Low Beam Lamp
LT LO BEAM
Driver Side Low Beam Lamp
DRL
Daytime Running Lamps
6-125
Fuses
Fuses
Usage
Usage
FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump
ABS2
Antilock Brake System 2
EXH
Exhaust Emissions
Blank
Blank
ENG VLV SOL
Engine Valve Solenoid
ECM/TRANS
INJ
Injectors
Engine Control Module,
Transmission
AIR SOL
AIR Solenoid
BCK UP
Back-Up Lamps
Blank
Blank
TRUNK/ HTD
SEATS
Trunk, Heated Seats
PCM/ECM
Powertrain Control Module/Engine
Control Module
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
SDM
Sensing Diagnostic Module
(Airbags)
ABS3
Antilock Brake System 3
OUTLET
Auxiliary Power Outlet
MIR
Mirrors
DLC
Data Link Connector
CNSTR VENT
Canister Vent
EPS
Electric Power Steering
AIR PUMP
AIR Pump
PRK LAMP
Parking Lamps
WPR
Windshield Wiper
IP IGN
Ignition
A/C CLTCH
Air Conditioning Clutch
CHMSL
Center High Mount Stop Lamp
6-126
Relays
Usage
REAR DEFOG
Rear Defogger
AIR SOL
(TURBO:
COOL FAN 2)
AIR Solenoid (L61)/Engine Cooling
Fan 2 (LNF)
WPR HI/LO
Windshield Wiper High/Low Speed
CRNK
Starter
COOL FAN 2
(TURBO:
COOL FANS)
Engine Cooling Fan (L61, LE5)/
Engine Cooling Fans (LNF)
FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump
WPR ON/OFF
Windshield Wiper On/Off
COOL FAN 1
Engine Cooling Fan 1
Relays
Usage
PWR/TRN
Powertrain
AIR PUMP
AIR Pump
A/C CLTCH
Air Conditioning Clutch
CHMSL
Center High Mount Stop Lamp
RUN/CRNK
Run, Crank
Misc.
Usage
PLR
Fuse Puller
6-127
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11 for more information.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Capacities
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Cooling System
2.0L L4 Engine
8.7 L
9.2 qt
2.2L L4 Engine
7.0 L
7.4 qt
2.0L L4 Engine
4.7 L
5.0 qt
2.2L L4 Engine
4.7 L
5.0 qt
50.0 L
13.2 gal
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
2.0L L4 Engine
2.2L L4 Engine (with NU6 emissions)
51.1 L
13.5 gal
2.2L L4 Engine (without NU6 emissions)
49.2 L
13.0 gal
6-128
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
Automatic Transmission (Bottom Pan Removal)
6.6 L
7.0 qt
Manual Transmission, 2.0L L4 Engine
(Complete Drain and Refill)
1.9 L
2.0 qt
Manual Transmission, 2.2L L4 Engine
(Complete Drain and Refill)
1.6 L
1.7 qt
140 Y
100 lb ft
Transmission Fluid
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
2.0L L4 Engine
X
Manual
0.89 mm (0.035 in)
2.2L L4 Engine
5
Automatic
Manual
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
6-129
2 NOTES
6-130
Section 7
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-11
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that:
.
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑25.
.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6‑7.
Introduction
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in
good working condition, improves fuel economy, and
reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality.
Because of all the different ways people use vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need more
frequent checks and services. Please read the
information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep the
vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer.
{ WARNING:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you
have any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 6‑5.
At your General Motors dealer/retailer, you can be
certain that you will receive the highest level of service
available. Your dealer /retailer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine GM replacement
parts, as well as, up to date tools and equipment to
ensure fast and accurate diagnostics.
7-2
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7‑11 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 7‑13. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer/retailer.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and performance of the
vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service for
new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to
13 000 km (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 6‑71.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Oil Soon Message
Displays
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑16. An Emission Control Service.
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a
year and the oil life system must be reset. Your dealer/
retailer has trained service technicians who will perform
this work and reset the system. If the engine oil life
system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within
5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last service. Reset the
oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine
Oil Life System on page 6‑21.
When the Change Oil Soon message displays, certain
services, checks, and inspections are required. The
services described for Maintenance I should be
performed at every engine oil change. The services
described for Maintenance II should be
performed when:
.
Maintenance I was performed the last time the
engine oil was changed.
.
It has been 10 months or more since the Change
Oil Soon message has displayed or since the last
service.
When the Change Oil Soon message displays, service
is required for the vehicle as soon as possible, within
the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system might not indicate
the need for vehicle service for more than a year. The
7-3
Maintenance I
.
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑16. An Emission Control Service.
.
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑28.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑35.
.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑63.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑71.
.
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑71.
.
Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must
be repaired and the fluid level checked.
.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven
in dusty conditions only). See Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter (2.0L Turbo Engine) on page 6‑23 or Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter (2.2L Engine) on page 6‑25.
.
Brake system inspection (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
7-4
Maintenance II
.
Perform all services described in Maintenance I.
.
Steering and suspension inspection. Visual
inspection for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear.
.
Engine cooling system inspection. Visual
inspection of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps and
replacement, if needed.
.
Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear,
cracking, or contamination and windshield and
wiper blade cleaning, if contaminated. See
Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 6‑117. Worn
or damaged wiper blade replacement. See
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 6‑53.
.
Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders, and
trunk lid hinges and latches lubrication. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11. More frequent lubrication may be
required when vehicle is exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
.
Restraint system component check. See Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 2‑74.
.
.
.
Automatic transmission fluid level check and
adding fluid, if needed. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6‑26.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Turbo Engine) on page 6‑23
or Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (2.2L Engine) on
page 6‑25.
Passenger compartment air filter replacement
(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). More
frequent replacement may be required if vehicle is
driven regularly under dusty conditions.
Additional Required Services
Once a Year
.
Starter switch check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑8.
.
Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park)
mechanism check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑8.
.
Automatic transmission shiftlock control system
check. See Owner Checks and Services on
page 7‑8.
.
Ignition transmission lock check. See Owner
Checks and Services on page 7‑8.
.
Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure
check. Radiator and air conditioning condenser
outside cleaning. See Cooling System on
page 6‑27.
.
Exhaust system and nearby heat shields
inspection for loose or damaged components.
.
Throttle system inspection for interference, binding
or for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate
accelerator or cruise control cables.
.
If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit, check the sealant expiration date printed on
the instruction label of the kit. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 6‑80.
At Each Fuel Stop
.
Engine oil level check. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑16.
.
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑28.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑35.
Once a Month
.
.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑63.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑71.
7-5
First Engine Oil Change After Every
40 000 km/25,000 Miles
.
Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
80 000 km/50,000 Miles
.
.
7-6
Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Turbo Engine) on
page 6‑23 or Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(2.2L Engine) on page 6‑25.
Automatic transmission fluid change (severe
service only) for vehicles mainly driven in heavy
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly or mountainous
terrain, when frequently towing a trailer, or used for
taxi, police, or delivery service. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6‑26.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.
Spark plug replacement. An Emission Control
Service.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.
Engine cooling system drain, flush, and refill,
cooling system and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator and air conditioning
condenser (or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). See Engine Coolant on page 6‑28. An
Emission Control Service.
.
Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An Emission Control
Service.
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system.
Service
•
•
Engine coolant level check.
•
•
Windshield washer fluid level check.
•
•
Tire inflation pressures check.
•
•
Tire wear inspection.
•
•
Rotate tires.
•
•
Fluids visual leak check.
•
•
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only).
•
•
Brake system inspection.
•
•
Steering and suspension inspection.
•
Engine cooling system inspection.
•
Windshield wiper blades inspection.
•
Body components lubrication.
•
Restraint system components check.
•
Passenger compartment air filter replacement.
•
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions).
•
7-7
Owner Checks and Services
Starter Switch Check
{ WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑31.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
7-8
3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only
in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the starter works in any
other position, your vehicle needs service.
For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift
lever in Neutral, push the clutch pedal down
halfway, and try to start the engine. The starter
should work only when the clutch pedal is pushed
down all the way to the floor. If the starter works
when the clutch pedal is not pushed all the way
down, your vehicle needs service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{ WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
.
For automatic transmission vehicles, the ignition
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever
is in P (Park). The ignition key should come out
only in LOCK/OFF.
.
For manual transmission vehicles, the ignition key
should come out only in LOCK/OFF.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.
It should only lock when turned to the right.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3‑31.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves
out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer for
service.
7-9
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
.
To check the parking brake's holding ability: With
the engine running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held
by the parking brake only.
.
To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
{ WARNING:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
7-10
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
(2.0L
L4 engine)
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard can be identified with the
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. However, not all
synthetic API oils with the starburst
symbol will meet this GM standard.
Look for and use only an oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M. For
the proper viscosity, see Engine Oil
on page 6‑16.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
(2.2L
L4 engine)
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
(API) Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle's
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 6‑16.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Engine Cooling water and use only DEX-COOL®
System
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 6‑28.
Hydraulic
Brake System
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, in
Canada 89021320).
7-11
Usage
Hydraulic
Clutch System
Windshield
Washer
Fluid/Lubricant
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, in
Canada 89021320).
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Manual
Transmission
(2.2L
L4 engine)
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Manual
Transmission
(2.0L
L4 engine)
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88862472, in
Canada 88862473).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
7-12
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Manual
Transmission
Shift Linkage
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor,
and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in
Canada 10953518) or Dielectric
Silicone Grease (GM Part No.
U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
2.0L L4 Engine
15909459
A3099C
2.2L L4 Engine
22731072
A3054C
Engine Oil Filter
12605566
PF457G
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
52493319
CF125
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Spark Plugs
2.0L L4 Engine
12620540
41-108
2.2L L4 Engine
12625058
41-103
Wiper Blades
Driver Side — 22 in (56 cm)
15243233
—
Passenger Side — 17 in (43 cm)
15243232
—
7-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing
Dotted line shows routing for vehicles without air
conditioning.
7-14
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
7-15
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date
7-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
7-17
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date
7-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Section 8
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . . .
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . .
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . .
Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-15
8-15
8-16
8-16
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-18
8-19
8-19
8-19
8-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will
be resolved by the dealer's sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE : Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
8-2
STEP TWO : If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, in the U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call
General Motors of Canada Customer Communication
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854
(French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
.
.
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
Dealership name and location.
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility. That
is why we suggest following Step One first.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners : Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs
or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this
informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you may
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
8-3
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners : In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be
aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/
Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in about 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
8-4
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools
and forms with greater ease.
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
.
Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
.
Online service and maintenance records
.
Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
.
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
.
OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Chevrolet — minus; www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
.
FAQ
.
Contact Us
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
.
My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
.
My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM dealers/retailers.
.
My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values,
or schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
.
My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
8-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the
U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
8-6
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your
vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle's eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
8-7
Roadside Assistance Program
Coverage
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
Services are provided up to 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes first.
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
.
Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
.
Telephone number of your location
.
Location of the vehicle
.
Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
.
Description of the problem
8-8
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In
Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission
from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too
often, or the same type of claim is made many times.
Services Provided
.
.
.
.
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough
fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service
station.
Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock
the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock
may be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud,
or snow.
Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire,
if equipped, must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's responsibility for
the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
.
Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
.
Legal fines.
.
Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
.
Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
.
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not
provided through this service.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is
required.
.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route.
There is a limit of six requests per year. Additional
travel information is also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
8-9
.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250♦kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada
Limited requires pre-authorization, original detailed
receipts, and a copy of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you make
arrangements and explain how to receive payment.
Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
8-10
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/
retailer, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day
as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Courtesy Transportation Program
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and extended powertrain,
and hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and
Canada.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps to
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the
following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This
includes one-way or round trip shuttle service within
reasonable time and distance parameters of the
dealer's area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer's
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes,
levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
8-11
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer for
specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle's resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to
ensure that your vehicle's designed appearance,
8-12
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New
Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle's
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known. Such
parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion
problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by that
warranty.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be
repaired with GM original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end
of your lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
.
Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
.
If there has been an injury, call emergency
services for help. Do not leave the scene of a
crash until all matters have been taken care of.
Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in
danger or you are instructed to move it by a police
officer.
.
Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
.
If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑8 for more information.
8-13
.
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver's name,
the service's name, and the phone number.
.
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it
is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you keep
these items in your vehicle.
.
.
8-14
Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver's license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), insurance
company and policy number, and a general
description of the damage to the other vehicle.
If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy
of the report for a nominal fee. In some states/
provinces with “no fault” insurance laws, a report
may not be necessary. This is especially true if
there are no injuries and both vehicles are
driveable.
.
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
.
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay the
full cost.
If another party's insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits
with that company. In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
8-16
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an
order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in
a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules
may store data to help your dealer/retailer technician
service your vehicle. Some modules may also store
data about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed. These modules
may also retain the owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature
settings.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
8-17
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
.
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
.
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
.
How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
8-18
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar®
If the vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
Navigation System
Radio Frequency Statement
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio
frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other GM
system containing personal information.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
8-19
2 NOTES
8-20
A
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Adjustments
Headlamp Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23, 6-25
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Airbag
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Airbag System
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62, 2-67
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . 2-60
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Airbags
Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Antenna
Fixed Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . 4-86
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-120
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-120
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Assistance Program, Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
i-1
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
B
Back-Up Lamps - Ambulance Body
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Boost Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Brake
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
i-2
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Back-Up Lamps - Ambulance Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . 6-50
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
C
California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Care of
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
CD, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Check
Engine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-120
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Clock, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Competitive Driving, Racing or Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
i-3
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Engine Temperature Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Information
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . 8-16
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Disc, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Display
Reconfigurable Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
i-4
Door
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Driver
Seat Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
DIC Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Driver Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Driving
At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Before a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
In Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
E
Easy Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
EDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-124
Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . . . .6-121
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23, 6-25
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Coolant Temperature Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Engine (cont.)
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Active Light . . . . . 5-12
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Indicator/Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23, 6-25
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Flat Tire, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
i-5
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-124
Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122
Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121
G
Gages
Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
i-6
Gasoline
Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
H
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Range Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Wiper Activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Hood
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
I
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Indicator/Warning LIghts
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Infants and Young Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Instrument Panel
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
K
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Lamps
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Mirror Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Taillamps and Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
LATCH System for Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Lighting
Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Active . . . . . . . . . 5-12
i-7
Lights (cont.)
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Highbeam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Locks
Automatic Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Lumbar
Manual Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
i-8
M
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Manual Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Manual Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Mirror Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Mirrors
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Outside Manual Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Outside Remote Control Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
N
P
Navigation System, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Paint, Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Parking
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Parking Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62, 2-67
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . .6-5
Phone
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
O
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
OnStar, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Outlets
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Outside
Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Manual Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Remote Control Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Owners, Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
i-9
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Proposition 65 Warning, California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
R
Racing or Other Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Radios
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Range Adjustment, Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Reconfigurable Performance Display (RPD) . . . . . . . 4-32
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
i - 10
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95, 6-100
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Replacement Parts
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
S
Safety Belts
Care of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Safety Belts Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Easy Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle . . . 6-6
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121
Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Shifting
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Spare Tire
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-95, 6-100
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-109
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
i - 11
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Storage Areas
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Driver Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . 6-88
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Taillamps
Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps . . . . . . 6-51
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Time, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
i - 12
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Installing the Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-95, 6-100
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Removing the Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-95, 6-100
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81, 6-88
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . .6-109
Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Towing
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33, 5-39
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Traction
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Traction System
Enhanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Transmission Operation, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Transmission Operation, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
V
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Parking Your . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-120
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121
Vehicle Personalization
DIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Ventilation Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
W
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Safety and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
i - 13
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Where to Put the Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Windshield
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Wiper Blades, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121
Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
i - 14
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Wiper Activated Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
X
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86